JP6859308B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Expected to be controlled to an advantageous state that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, to execute a variable display, to display a specific display that can specify the number of times the variable display is executed after the advantageous state ends, and to be controlled to the advantageous state. A game machine that executes a suggestion effect suggesting a degree has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-093793

The invention described in Patent Document 1 includes a variable display of the first identification information, a variable display of the second identification information, and the like.
In a game machine that can execute the above in parallel, there is a possibility that the suggestion effect cannot be suitably executed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and preferably produces a suggestion effect in a gaming machine capable of performing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information in parallel. The purpose is to apply a game machine that can be executed.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display means that executes the variable display and the advantageous state are terminated. A specific display means for displaying a specific display capable of specifying the number of executions of the variable display executed after the execution, and a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state are provided. The variable display means can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel, and as a predetermined gaming state different from the advantageous state, the first predetermined gaming state and the first predetermined gaming state It is possible to control the second predetermined gaming state, which is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific display means can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information. and execution count of the variable display, the total number of times capable particular, are capable of displaying the specific view, before Symbol suggested demonstration execution unit, as the suggested effect, displaying the specific display in the normal manner and different specific embodiments by the being capable of performing favorable conditions to specific suggestion effect suggests expectation to be controlled, when it is controlled before Symbol first predetermined gaming state, the variable display of the first identification information The specific suggestion effect can be executed, and the specific suggestion effect is not executed for the variable display of the second identification information.
(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player). Pachinko game machine 1 etc.), variable display means for executing variable display (for example, CPU 103 for executing a special figure game), and specific display capable of specifying the number of times variable display is executed after the advantageous state ends. (For example, an effect control CPU 120 that displays a variation number display that can specify the number of times the special figure game executed after the jackpot game state has ended) is controlled to the advantageous state. The variable display means includes a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting an expectation degree (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a notice effect suggesting a controlled expectation degree of a jackpot game state). , The variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the CPU 103 performs the first special figure game and the second special figure game in parallel. The specific display means can specify the total number of times the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the number of times the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the variation number display so that the total number of times the first special figure game is executed and the number of times the second special figure game is executed can be specified. As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means executes the specific suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state by displaying the specific display in a specific mode different from the normal mode. It is possible (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to a jackpot game state by displaying the variation number display larger than the normal size or by applying an effect to the variation number display as a notice effect. The specific suggestion effect is given to the variable display of the first identification information when the game is controlled to a predetermined game state different from the advantageous state. Is possible, and the specific suggestion effect is not executed for the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 controls to a low probability / low base state (normal state) different from the jackpot game state. When this is done, the variable number display notice can be executed for the first special figure game, and the variable number display notice is not executed for the second special figure game, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be suitably executed in the game machine capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel.

(2) In the game machine of the above (1), the specific display means responds to the execution of the variable display of the second identification information even when the variable display of the first identification information is not executed. hand,
The mode of the specific display is updated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is in a jackpot game state according to the execution of the second special figure game even when the first special figure game is not executed. It is also possible to update the number of the fluctuation number display indicating the number of executions of the special figure game executed after the end of.

According to such a configuration, a specific display can be preferably displayed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2), the specific display means variablely displays the second identification information when the specific suggestion effect is executed for the variable display of the first identification information. Is started, the mode of the specific display is updated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the first
If the second special figure game is started while the variable number display notice is being executed for the special figure game, the number of the variable number display may be updated, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be preferably executed and the specific display can be preferably displayed.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above, the suggestion effect executing means is
If the variable display of the second identification information is started while the specific suggestion effect is being executed for the variable display of the first identification information, the second identification information is finished when the variable display of the first identification information ends. Even if the variable display of is not finished, the specific suggestion effect is terminated (for example, the effect control CPU).
In 120, if the second special figure game is started while the variable number display notice is being executed for the first special figure game, the second special figure game ends when the first special figure game ends. Even if this is not done, the notification of the number of fluctuations may be terminated).

According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be preferably executed and the specific display can be preferably displayed.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above, the suggestion effect executing means is
If the variable display of the second identification information is started while the specific suggestion effect is being executed for the variable display of the first identification information, the specific suggestion effect is stopped (for example, the effect control CPU 1).
20 may cancel the fluctuation number display notice if the second special figure game is started while the fluctuation number display notice is being executed for the first special figure game).

According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be preferably executed and the specific display can be preferably displayed.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above, the game machine includes a hold storage means for storing information related to the variable display as hold information, and the suggestion effect execution means is a variable display of the second identification information. When the information related to is stored as the hold information, the execution of the specific suggestion effect for the variable display of the first identification information is restricted (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a hold memory corresponding to the second special figure game). In this case, the fluctuation number display notice for the first special figure game is not executed, and the execution rate of the fluctuation number display notice for the first special figure game is set to be lower than the execution rate of other notice effects. Alternatively, the change number display notice for the first special figure game may be executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize).

According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be preferably executed and the specific display can be preferably displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table, the small hit determination table, and the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for passing through the 1st gate. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for passing through the 2nd gate. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the way of transition of a game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an external output signal. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the battle challenge production and the chance battle production. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for a variable display start. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the continuation suggestion effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode determination table and effect pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the meter increase effect processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the battle challenge production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the battle challenge production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the chance battle production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the chance battle production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the small hit meter effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the case which the setting value can be changed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control process process which concerns on a feature part 19SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small symbol variable display processing which concerns on a feature part 19SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start waiting process which concerns on a feature part 19SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the demo effect setting process which concerns on a feature part 19SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st variable display start waiting process which concerns on a feature part 19SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd variable display start waiting process which concerns on a feature part 19SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation number display notice determination processing which concerns on a feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation number display notice determination table which concerns on a feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the variation number display notice pattern determination table which concerns on a feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect mode of the variation number display and the variation number display notice in a low probability / low base state (normal state) which concerns on a feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the production mode of the variation number display in the 1st demo production. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect mode of the variation number display and the variation number display notice in the low probability / low base state (normal state) which concerns on the modification 1 of the feature part 19SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation number display notice determination process which concerns on the modification 2 of the feature part 19SH.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. First to do
A special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. Special symbols include numbers indicating "0" to "9" and "
It is represented by a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Lumines).
It is composed of sense) and displays various production images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game,
Variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, "
The decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction or update display) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25 configured to include a plurality of LEDs at a predetermined position on the game board 2
A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the first hold indicator 25B according to the number of LEDs lit. The second reserved storage number is displayed.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2, and the first starting opening switch 2 is used.
Detected by 2A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done.
In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched by aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed strike). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, since the row of nails 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the mouth on the left side of the game area and also providing the row of nails 19.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction.
The large winning opening located below the bottom member is changed into an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (also referred to as an open state) and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize (also referred to as a closed state). Special variable winning ball device 7
Moved the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. These special variable winning ball devices 17 and variable winning ball devices 6B
Is located below the bottom member by moving the plate-shaped bottom member, which extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state and is formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, in the front-rear direction. The special winning opening and the second starting winning opening are changed into an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (also referred to as an open state) and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize (also referred to as a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 17
In the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the bottom surface member is moved forward toward the front. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B is a normal symbol display 2
When the symbol hits 0 and the symbol is derived and displayed, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, and the second start winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. Execute open control.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6
B is formed so as to have a similar structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed so as to be slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is open, the game ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that it is.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened,
It will be in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed and controlled to close the large winning opening, the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other winning holes such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the gaming area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the gaming area and performs a firing operation (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area), the normal symbol display 2
0 is provided. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are located at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3.
Is provided, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. )
A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. Stick controller 31
A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. Pachinko game machine 1
When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A by performing a left-handing operation by the rotation operation of the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided by the player, the first special symbol display device 4A performs the left-handing operation. 1 The special figure game is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "
7 ”, the actual design differs depending on the jackpot type described later. ) Is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, resulting in a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, how to open the big prize opening (
Multiple types of game states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state (number of rounds and open upper limit period) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As a big hit type, a big hit type that can get many prize balls,
A jackpot type with few or few prize balls may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time reduction control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state is executed (time reduction state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game ball from the normal state. High base state is a special symbol (especially the second
Since the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. To do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state,
It is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed strike operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol lost".
Will be. When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "
7 ”, the actual design differs depending on the jackpot type described later. ) Is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit", and when a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. In addition, it should be noted.
The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the game effect lamp 9. Equal / extinguishing, movement of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. )
Is also stopped and displayed (derived).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example,"
The same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (
For example, "6" etc.) may be displayed together as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,""is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C,
The decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. Besides,
On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.
And so on.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101.
RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 and CPU (Centra)
l Processing Unit) 103, random number circuit 104, and I / O (Inpu)
It is provided with t / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, ROM10
Various data stored in 1 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). Controls (drives) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc.
It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal to be used, a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) Detect signals (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is
It is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )))
, The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, ROM
Various data (data such as various tables) stored in 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 includes a controller sensor unit 35A or a push sensor 35.
The display control unit 123 may be instructed to execute the effect based on the detection signal from B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content).

The display control unit 123 is a VDP (Video Display Processor),
CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video)
o RAM) and the like are provided, and the effect is executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the effect image to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5.
To display. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or lamp signal (signal that specifies the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp)
Is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 has various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects.
Numerical data indicating is counted up to date. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3).
). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (
Step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, C
The PU 103 clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102.
Perform M clear processing and set the initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), the RAM
It is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.)
In addition, the state of the backup flag and the error detection code are also included. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. RAM1 with backup flag off
If the backup data is not stored in 02 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes),
The CPU 103 checks the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. If it is determined that these match, RAM10
It is determined that the data of 2 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), CP
The U103 performs a restoration process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120
An appropriate screen display may be performed based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (.
Step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 10 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).
It is sent to No. 3, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 10
First, by executing a predetermined switch process, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 pass through the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not the detection signal is received from various switches such as (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Information indicating the number of winnings, etc.)
, Data such as probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variation state has occurred) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). C
By executing the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the PU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the first special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like. (Details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). By executing the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the second special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like. To. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, C
The PU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, C
The PU 103 first executes the first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, the occurrence of a start winning in the first starting winning opening is detected, and the RAM 10
The process of storing the hold information in the predetermined area of 2 and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the effect control board 12 is transmitted to send the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is produced from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S121A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. Each process of the first special symbol process process (step S)
In 110A to S121A), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

In the first special symbol normal processing in step S110A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0".
It is executed when (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is set based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

In the first variation pattern setting process of step S111A, the value of the first special figure process flag is ".
It is executed when "1". In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is determined based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes a process of determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns using. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

In the first special symbol variation process in step S112A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2".
Is executed when. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation processing is completed. To do.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed.
When the variation display of the special symbol is in progress, the variation display of the second special symbol may result in a small hit and be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is the second small hit). (Determining whether or not the value corresponds to the pre-opening process to the second small hit end process), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag corresponds to the first special symbol variation process. The value is not changed, and the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process if the small hit game is not in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

In the first special symbol stop process of step S113A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3".
Is executed when. In this first special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (
It includes a process to make settings for (deriving). Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "9". If the display result is "missing", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

In the process of waiting for the passage of the first gate in step S114A, the value of the fourth special figure process flag is "4".
In this first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passing gate 41. When the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41 is detected, the first special figure The value of the process flag is updated to "5".

In the first jackpot opening preprocessing in step S115A, the value of the first special figure process flag is "5".
Is executed when. In this first big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the display result is "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be in the open state, etc. It is included. When opening the big prize opening
A process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are complete,
The value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the first jackpot release preprocessing ends.

In the process during the opening of the first jackpot in step S116A, the value of the first special figure process flag is "6".
Is executed when. In this first big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like are used. , It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "7" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Then, the processing during the opening of the first jackpot is completed.

In the post-processing after opening the first jackpot in step S117A, the value of the first special figure process flag is "7".
Is executed when. In this first big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings for ending the game state.
Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the first special figure Figure The value of the process flag is updated to "8". When the value of the first special figure process flag is updated, the post-processing after opening the first jackpot ends.

The first jackpot end process of step S118A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “8”. The first jackpot end process corresponds to a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period corresponding to a period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a process of waiting until the end of the jackpot game state is completed. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting probabilistic change control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first jackpot end process ends.

In the first small hit release preprocessing in step S119A, the value of the first special figure process flag is "9".
Is executed when. This first small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". .. At this time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the first small hit release preprocessing ends.

In the process during the opening of the first small hit in step S120A, the value of the first special figure process flag is "10".
In this process during the opening of the first small hit, the special winning opening is opened based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the first special figure process The value of the flag is updated to "11", and the processing during the opening of the first small hit ends.

In the first small hit end process of step S121A, the value of the first special figure process flag is "11".
Is executed when. The first small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first small hit end process ends.

The small hit ending period corresponding to the small hit end processing period may be configured to differ depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the difference between the execution period of the effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes large. Is assumed. During the suspension period, the decorative symbol will be displayed to stop shaking, but if the period is long, there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the normal state, the small hit ending period is set to the KT state (
It is preferable to make it shorter than the first KT state and the second KT state, which will be described later. For example, in the normal state, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds, and in the KT state, the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds. Further, in this example, in the first KT state, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening in the small hit game state (details will be described later). Do not execute. Therefore, in the first KT state, the second
The small hit ending period may be shortened as compared with the KT state. On the other hand, the second
In the KT state, since it is easy for the game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening in the small hit game state (details will be described later), an effect emphasizing that the ball is controlled in the small hit game state is executed (details will be described later).
For example, an image indicating that a small hit game is in progress is displayed). Therefore, in the second KT state, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. For example, in the first KT state, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds, and in the second KT state, the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds. Further, in addition to or instead of the small hit ending period corresponding to the small hit end processing period, the small hit fanfare period corresponding to the first small hit opening pre-processing period is also the same as the small hit ending period. The length of the period may be different depending on the state.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103).
) Determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the first small hit opening preprocessing to the first small hit end processing). (Determine whether or not), if the small hit game is in progress, do not change the value of the 2nd special figure process flag from the value corresponding to the 2nd special symbol change processing, and if it is not in the small hit game, 2 The value of the special figure process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do.
Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73).
). The timer interrupt flag is set for a predetermined time (for example, 2) based on the CTC register setting, for example.
It is set to the on state every time (milliseconds) elapses. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on,
The effect control CPU 120 is automatically set to disable interrupts, but when a CPU that is not automatically disabled is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is turned on in step S73 (step S73; Ye
s), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, the main board 1
After reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of 1 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. It is said. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the RAM 1 may be stored so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like.
The reception flag provided in 22 is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

In this embodiment, when an effective start winning prize is generated in the first starting winning opening A, an effect control command (first holding storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first reserved storage number has been increased by 1 is transmitted. When a valid start winning is generated in the second starting winning opening, an effect control command (second holding storage number addition designation command) for designating that the second reserved storage number has been increased by 1 is transmitted. In addition, when an effective start winning prize is generated for any of the starting winning openings (only the first starting winning opening in this example), a look-ahead determination of the display result, fluctuation pattern, etc. in the special figure game is performed, and the determination result is specified. The effect control command (command for specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) is transmitted. When the first special figure game is started, an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first reserved memory number has decreased by 1 is transmitted, and the second special figure game is started. When the game is started, an effect control command (second hold storage number subtraction specification command) is transmitted to specify that the second hold storage number has decreased by 1, so that the effect control board 12 also has the first hold storage number and the effect control board 12 side. The number of second reserved memories can be grasped. In step S161, a determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the look-ahead advance notice effect are performed based on the winning determination result designation command, and the first step is performed.
A process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the hold storage number addition designation command and the second hold storage number addition designation command. Also, when the first hold storage number subtraction specification command and the second hold storage number subtraction specification command are received, the process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the hold storage number specified from those commands. Will be done. In this embodiment, only the look-ahead notice effect for the first special figure game can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the look-ahead notice effect for the second special figure game may also be executed.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, the RAM 12
Depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in 2, the following steps S170 to S1
One of the 77 processes is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. Image display device 5
If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern in is started, the value of the effect process flag is set to ".
Update to 1 ”and end the variable display start waiting process.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
By instructing the display control unit 123, the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 can be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the movable body 32 can be driven, and the voice control board 13 can be driven. Speakers 8L, 8 by the output of the command (sound effect signal) to
During variable display of decorative symbols, such as outputting voice or sound effect from R, and turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 or decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Execute various production controls. After performing such production control
For example, in response to reading an exit code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol from the effect control pattern, or receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol should be stopped and displayed. The final decorative pattern that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the final decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".
The effect processing during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120
For example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state is set, and various effect controls in the small hit game state are executed based on the set content. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. is there"
Update to 5 ”and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

What is displayed during the variable display of a special symbol is one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-").
However, the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).
..

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) , Regular Bonus, RT, AT, A
The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of RT and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be a form of direct execution using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, the expression ("high", "high", "high", "high", "high"
Expressions such as "low" and "differentiate") may include that one is in the proportion of "0%". For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 014IW)
Next, the feature unit 014IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 014IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 014IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In the feature unit 014IW, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state, as will be described later, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and the small hit Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, the second K
In the T state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this feature unit 014IW, the variable winning ball device 6B is hit by a normal figure.
The probability that is in the open state is the same in the KT state and the normal state (for example, 100%, that is, 100% per normal symbol regardless of the state), but it is determined to be a small hit when the first special symbol fluctuates. However, it is configured so that it may be determined as a small hit when the second special symbol fluctuates (however, except for the case of forced loss described later), so the KT state is usually set to the KT state. It is in a gaming state where it is easier to hit a small hit than in the state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 100%), but the variation selected when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is smaller than in the normal state. It may be in a gaming state where it is easy to hit. In addition, in this feature unit 014IW, the normal map game is always configured to hit the normal map, but it is not limited to such a configuration, and the normal map may be lost and the KT state is set. It is also possible that the rate of loss of the normal figure is lower than that in the normal state.

Further, the feature unit 014IW is configured so that the time required from the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, the feature unit 014IW has a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required for the game to be played, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the first KT state, the one The game ball can be directly entered into the variable winning ball device 6B.

FIG. 8-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table 138IW130a. The jackpot determination table 138IW130a is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with a hit determination random number is set.
The jackpot judgment table 138IW130a shows a non-probability state (low probability state (low probability / non-KT)).
Non-probability big hit judgment table used in the state, low probability / 1st KT state), and probabilistic big hit judgment used in the probabilistic state (high probability state (high probability / 1st KT state, high probability / 2nd KT state)). There is a table. The jackpot judgment table at the time of non-probability change is shown in Fig. 8-1 (
Each numerical value described in the left column of A) is set, and in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change, FIG.
Each numerical value described in the right column of 1 (A) is set. The numerical value shown in FIG. 8-1 (A) is the jackpot determination value.

8-1 (B) and 8-1 (C) are explanatory views showing the small hit determination tables 138IW130b and 130c. Of these, FIG. 8-1 (B) shows a small hit determination table 138IW130b for the first special symbol used when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-1 (C) shows a small hit determination table 138IW130c for the second special symbol used when executing the variation display of the second special symbol. The small hit judgment table is ROM10
It is a set of data stored in 1 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with a hit determination random number is set. The small hit determination tables 138IW130b and 130c are in non-probability state (low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state), respectively).
) And the probability change state (high probability state (high probability / high probability /)
There is a small hit determination table at the time of probability change used in the first KT state, high probability / second KT state)). Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIGS. 8-1 (B) and (C) is set in the non-probability change small hit determination table, and FIG. 8-1 (B) is set in the probability change small hit determination table. ), Each numerical value described in the right column of (C) is set. Further, the numerical values shown in FIGS. 8-1 (B) and 8-1 (C) are small hit determination values.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the small hit determination table 138 for the first special symbol
A small hit determination value is not assigned to the IW130b, and if it is not determined to be a big hit, it may not be a small hit. That is, if it is not determined to be a big hit, all are missed, and the small hit probability is 0%. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (C), in the small hit determination table 138IW130c for the second special symbol, both the non-probability change small hit determination table and the probability change small hit determination table have determination values (32767 to 65535). ) Is assigned as a small hit determination value, and the small hit probability is 50%. In addition, not limited to the configuration of this example, in the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is not determined to be a big hit, it is always a small hit, and the small hit probability may be 100%, or the probability variation state. Only the small hit probability may be set to 100%.

Not limited to the configuration of this example, the small hit determination value may be set so that a small hit occurs even in the variable display of the first special symbol. In this case, it is desirable that the small hit probability of the variable display of the first special symbol is the same as or lower than the small hit probability of the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type of the previous jackpot is the probability variation jackpot E or the probability variation jackpot F (see FIG. 8-22), the small hit game state is also controlled based on the variation display of the first special symbol, which will be described later. The value of the small hit count counter may be added. In addition, during the simultaneous variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of one special symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of one special symbol, and the variation display of the other is lost. It may be forcibly stopped.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the hit determination random number. The hit determination random number is one of those shown in FIG. 8-1 (A). If it matches the jackpot judgment value, it is decided to make a jackpot for the special symbol. In addition, FIG. 8-
The "probability" shown in 1 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit, and in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). It is 10 times larger. Further, the "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-1 (B) and 8-1 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit game state, but whether or not the stop symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is to be a small hit symbol. It also means deciding whether or not.

8-1 (D) and 8-1 (E) show the jackpot type determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101.
It is explanatory drawing which shows 38IW131a, 131b. Big hit type judgment table 138IW1
When it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot types 31a and 131b are set to "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot B" based on the random number for determining the hit type.
It is referred to to determine one of "Probability change jackpot C", "Probability variation jackpot D", "Probability variation jackpot E", "Probability variation jackpot F", "Normal jackpot A", "Normal jackpot B" and "Normal jackpot C". It is a table. Below, probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, probabilistic jackpot C, probabilistic jackpot D,
The probabilistic jackpot E and the probabilistic jackpot F are also collectively referred to as the probabilistic jackpot. Further, the normal jackpot A, the normal jackpot B, and the normal jackpot C are collectively also simply referred to as a normal jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 8-1 (D), in the feature unit 014IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of "probability variation jackpot A" is determined with a probability of 15%, and the probability of 15%. Is determined as "probability change jackpot B", 15% probability is determined as "probability variation jackpot C", 15% probability is determined as "probability variation jackpot D", and 3% probability is determined as "probability variation jackpot E". It is determined as "probability variation jackpot F" with a probability of 2%, "normal jackpot A" with a probability of 15%, "normal jackpot B" with a probability of 15%, and "normal jackpot B" with a probability of 5%. It is usually determined as "big hit C".

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (E), in the present feature unit 014IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined as "probability variation jackpot A" with a probability of 15%, and 15%. With the probability of "
Probability change jackpot B "is determined, 15% probability is determined as" probability variation jackpot C ", 15% probability is determined as" probability variation jackpot D ", and 3% probability is determined as" probability variation jackpot E ". There is a 2% chance that it will be determined as "probability variable jackpot F", and a 35% chance that it will be determined as "normal jackpot A".

As shown in FIGS. 8-1 (D) and 8-1 (E), in the present feature unit 014IW, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, "normal jackpot A" and "normal jackpot B" among the normal jackpots are executed. "And" normal jackpot C "can be determined, but when executing the variable display of the second special symbol," normal jackpot B "and" normal jackpot C "of the normal jackpots "Normal jackpot A" which is not decided and has a higher degree of advantage than "normal jackpot B" and "normal jackpot C"
Is configured to be determined only. The difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type will be described later.

In the feature unit 014IW, the conditions for shifting to the game state controlled after the big hit game and the second KT state differ depending on the big hit type, but the degree of advantage in the big hit game state is the same. That is, the feature unit 014IW is configured to be controlled to a jackpot game state of 5 rounds regardless of the jackpot type. The configuration of the feature unit 014IW is not limited to this, and the degree of advantage (for example, the number of rounds) in the jackpot gaming state may be different for each jackpot type.

In this feature unit 014IW, a predetermined period (30 in this example) in each round of the jackpot game.
The large winning openings are controlled to be open until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls have passed, and up to 10 large winning openings can be won in each round. is there. In addition, it should be noted.
In addition to the jackpot type indicated by the feature unit 014IW, for example, "2R probability variation jackpot" and "2R normal jackpot" are provided, and when "2R probability variation jackpot" and "2R normal jackpot" are obtained, each of the jackpot games. Even if the large winning openings are controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in the round, and the number of winnings in the large winning openings that can be won in each round is about 2-3. Good.

In the feature unit 014IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either a high probability state or a low probability state according to the big hit type. Specifically, when a probability variation jackpot occurs, it is controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, when a normal big hit occurs, it is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the big hit game state.

Further, in the present feature unit 014IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either the first KT state or the second KT state according to the big hit type. Specifically, when the probability variation jackpot A occurs, it is controlled to the second KT state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Also, the probability variation jackpot B to F
And when any of the normal jackpots A to C occurs, the first KT state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends.

Further, in the feature unit 014IW, when any of the probabilistic jackpots B to F and the normal jackpots A to C occurs, the game is controlled to the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, but a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the first KT state. When it is established, it is configured to shift from the first KT state to the second KT state or the non-KT state.

Specifically, when any of the probability variation jackpot B, the probability variation jackpot C, and the probability variation jackpot D occurs, the state shifts to the first KT state after the end of the jackpot game state, and the next jackpot occurs or the number of times according to the jackpot type. The first KT state is maintained until the first transition condition of executing the fluctuation display of is satisfied, and when the first transition condition is satisfied, the transition from the first KT state to the second KT state is performed.

In this feature unit 014IW, one of a plurality of types of first transition conditions is set according to the jackpot type (for example, it is realized by the processing of step 014IWS104A described later), and the probability variation jackpot B is used. If so, the execution of the variable display 90 times is the first transition condition (
Hereinafter, it is also set as the first transition condition A), and if it is the probability variation jackpot C, the execution of the variation display 65 times is set as the first transition condition (hereinafter, also referred to as the first transition condition B), and the probability variation jackpot If it is D, the execution of the fluctuation display 40 times is set as the first transition condition (hereinafter, also referred to as the first transition condition C).

Therefore, when the probability variation jackpot B occurs and the state shifts to the first KT state, the first transition condition (first transition condition A) is executed by executing 90 fluctuation display times without the occurrence of the next jackpot. When it is established, the state shifts from the first KT state to the second KT state. Further, when the probability variation jackpot C occurs and the state shifts to the first KT state, the first transition condition (first transition condition B) is satisfied by executing the fluctuation display 65 times without the occurrence of the next jackpot. Then, the state shifts from the first KT state to the second KT state. Further, when the probability variation jackpot C occurs and the state shifts to the first KT state, the first transition condition (first transition condition C) is satisfied by executing the fluctuation display 40 times without the occurrence of the next jackpot. Then, the state shifts from the first KT state to the second KT state. These controls are, for example, steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS008B and step 014IWS104, which will be described later.
It is realized by the process of A.

Further, when either the probabilistic jackpot E or the probabilistic jackpot F occurs, the state shifts to the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the next jackpot occurs or the variable display of the number of times according to the jackpot type is executed. The first KT state is maintained until either the first transition condition or the second transition condition of the occurrence of the small hit game state of the number of times according to the big hit type is satisfied.
When either the first transition condition or the second transition condition is satisfied, the transition from the first KT state to the second KT state is performed. Hereinafter, the first transition condition and the second transition condition are collectively referred to simply as a transition condition.

In this feature unit 014IW, one of a plurality of types of second transition conditions is set according to the jackpot type (for example, it is realized by the processing of step 014IWS107A described later), and the probability variation jackpot E is used. If there is, the occurrence of 30 small hit game states is set as the second transition condition (hereinafter, also referred to as the second transition condition A), and if the probability variation big hit F, the occurrence of 70 small hit game states is the second. 2 It is set as a transition condition (hereinafter, also referred to as a second transition condition B). Further, in both the probabilistic jackpot E and the probabilistic jackpot F, the execution of the variation display 90 times is set as the first transition condition.

Therefore, when the probability variation jackpot E occurs and the state shifts to the first KT state, the first transition condition (first transition condition A) of executing the fluctuation display 90 times without the occurrence of the next jackpot and 3
When any one of the transition conditions of the second transition condition (second transition condition A) of the occurrence of the small hit game state of 0 times is satisfied, the transition from the first KT state to the second KT state is performed. Also, the probability change jackpot F
When it occurs and shifts to the first KT state, the first transition condition (first transition condition A) of executing the fluctuation display 90 times and the small hit gaming state of 70 times without the next big hit occur. When any one of the transition conditions of the second transition condition (second transition condition B) of the occurrence of is satisfied, the first
It shifts from the KT state to the second KT state. These controls are, for example, step 01 described later.
4IWS001B to 014IWS008B, Step 014IWS009B to 014IW
It is realized by the processing of S015B, step 014IWS104A, and step 014IWS107A. Not limited to the configuration of the feature unit 014IW, different conditions may be set for the first transition condition for the probability variation jackpot E and the probability variation jackpot F.

Further, when any of the normal jackpot A, the normal jackpot B, and the normal jackpot C occurs, the state shifts to the first KT state after the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs, or the variable display of the number of times according to the jackpot type is executed. The first KT state is maintained until the first transition condition is satisfied, and when the first transition condition is satisfied, the state shifts from the first KT state to the non-KT state.

The feature unit 014IW is configured to set any of a plurality of types of first transition conditions according to the jackpot type (for example, realized by the processing of step 014IWS110A), and if it is a normal jackpot A, 90 times of variable display execution is set as the first transition condition (first transition condition A), and if it is a normal jackpot B, 65 times of variable display execution is set as the first transition condition (first transition condition B). If it is a normal jackpot C, execution of the fluctuation display 40 times is set as the first transition condition (first transition condition C).

Therefore, when a normal jackpot A occurs and the state shifts to the first KT state, the first transition condition (first transition condition A) of executing the fluctuation display 90 times without the next jackpot is satisfied. , Transition from the first KT state to the non-KT state. In addition, a big hit B usually occurs and the first K
In the case of transitioning to the T state, if the first transition condition (first transition condition B) of executing the fluctuation display 65 times is satisfied without the next big hit occurring, the transition from the first KT state to the non-KT state is performed. To do. When the normal jackpot C occurs and the state shifts to the first KT state, if the first transition condition (first transition condition C) of executing the fluctuation display 40 times is satisfied without the next jackpot occurring, the first It shifts from the 1KT state to the non-KT state. These controls are realized, for example, by the processes of steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS007B and 014IWS110A, which will be described later.

Hereinafter, among the first KT states, the first KT states in which the probability variation jackpots B to D occur and are transferred after the jackpot game are also referred to as the first KT state A, and the probability variation jackpots E and F are generated and transition after the jackpot game. The first KT state to be performed is also referred to as the first KT state B, and usually jackpots A to C occur, and
The first KT state that is transferred after the jackpot game is also referred to as the first KT state C. That is, the first KT state A is a state in which the state shifts to the second KT state when the first transition condition is satisfied, and the first K
The T state B is a state in which the state shifts to the second KT state when either the first transition condition or the second transition condition is satisfied, and the first KT state C shifts to the non-KT state when the first transition condition is satisfied. It is in a state.

When the probability variation jackpot A occurs, the game shifts to the second KT state after the jackpot game, and the second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. That is, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) loops until a big hit occurs.

In this feature unit 014IW, the first KT state (1st KT state (
For example, it is possible to shift from the first KT states A and B) to the second KT state, and the first KT is based on the fact that either the first transition condition or the second transition condition is satisfied.
It is configured so that it is possible to shift from the state (for example, the first KT state B) to the second KT state. With such a configuration, it is possible to give diversity to the conditions for shifting to the second KT state, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 014IW, as transition conditions for transitioning from the first KT state to the second KT state, a first transition condition of executing a predetermined number of fluctuation displays and a second transition condition of generating a predetermined number of small hit game states. It is configured so that migration conditions can be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the number of fluctuations and the number of occurrences of the small hit game state (that is, the number of times the small hit symbol is derived and displayed), and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 014IW, when the control is performed in either the first KT state A or B, the state shifts to the second KT state when the first transition condition is satisfied, while when the control is performed in the first KT state C It is configured to shift to the non-KT state when the first transition condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which of the first KT states A to C is controlled, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in this feature unit 014IW, when any of the first KT states A and B is controlled by the occurrence of any of the probabilistic jackpots B to F, the state is controlled to a high probability state at the same time, and when the first transition condition is satisfied, the first While shifting to the 2KT state, when it is normally controlled to the first KT state C by the occurrence of any of the jackpots A to C, it is controlled to the low probability state at the same time, and when the first transition condition is satisfied, it shifts to the non-KT state. It is configured in. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to which of the high-probability state and the low-probability state is controlled, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 014IW, a plurality of types of first transition conditions are provided, and each of them is configured so that the ease of establishment is different. That is, depending on the type of the first transition condition, the second K
Since the ease of transition to the T state or the non-KT state is different, the degree of advantage is different. For example, in the first KT state A that shifts to the second KT state when the transition condition is satisfied, the degree of advantage increases in the order in which the transition is likely to be established (that is, the order in which the transition to the second KT state is likely to occur). Specifically, the degree of advantage increases in the order of first transition condition C (40 times)> first transition condition B (65 times)> first transition condition A (90 times). On the other hand, in the first KT state C, which shifts to the non-KT state when the transition condition is satisfied, the degree of advantage increases in the order in which it is difficult to hold (that is, the order in which it is difficult to shift to the non-KT state). Specifically, the degree of advantage increases in the order of first transition condition A (90 times)> first transition condition B (65 times)> first transition condition C (40 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games, and to pay attention to which of the first KT states A to C is controlled and the type of the first transition condition that has been set.
It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 014IW, a plurality of types of second transition conditions are provided, and the ease of establishment of each is different. That is, depending on the type of the second transition condition, the second K
Since the ease of transition to the T state is different, the degree of advantage is different. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games, to pay attention to the type of the second transition condition, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the feature unit 014IW is provided with a plurality of jackpot types, and is configured so that the transition conditions for transitioning from the first KT state to the second KT state or the non-KT state differ depending on the jackpot type. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games, pay attention to the jackpot type, and improve the game entertainment.

In the feature unit 014IW, the degree of advantage is higher in the order of the second KT state> the first KT state> the non-KT state. Therefore, of the probabilistic jackpots A to F and the normal jackpots A to C, the probabilistic jackpot A, which is controlled to the second KT state when the jackpot gaming state ends, is the jackpot type with the highest degree of advantage. Further, in the probabilistic jackpots B to D, the degree of advantage increases in the order in which the first transition conditions that are likely to be satisfied are set (that is, the order in which the transition to the second KT state is easy). Specifically, the degree of advantage increases in the order of probabilistic jackpot D> probabilistic jackpot C> probabilistic jackpot B. In addition, probabilistic jackpot E, F
Then, since the first transition conditions are the same, the degree of advantage increases in the order in which the second transition conditions that are likely to be satisfied are set (that is, the order in which the transition to the second KT state is easy). Specifically, the degree of advantage increases in the order of probabilistic jackpot E> probabilistic jackpot F. Further, in the normal jackpots A to C, the degree of advantage increases in the order in which the first transition condition that is difficult to be satisfied is set (that is, the order in which the transition to the non-KT state is difficult). Specifically, the degree of advantage increases in the order of normal jackpot A> normal jackpot B> normal jackpot C.

FIG. 8-1 (F) shows the small hit type determination table 138IW stored in the ROM 101.
It is explanatory drawing which shows 131c. The small hit type determination table 138IW131c is based on a random number for determining the small hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol.
It is a table referred to for determining the type of a small hit as one of "small hit A", "small hit B" and "small hit C".

As shown in FIG. 8-1 (F), in the present feature unit 014IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined as "small hit A" with a probability of 33%, and the probability of 33%. "Small hit B"
Is determined, and it is determined as "small hit C" with a probability of 34%.

The "small hit A" is a small hit in which the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in the open state for 0.5 seconds three times in the small hit game state, and the "small hit B" is a small hit. The special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be open twice for 0.5 seconds in the gaming state, and the "small hit C" is the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small hit gaming state. It is a small hit in which the control to be in the open state is performed once for 0.5 seconds. When the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened a plurality of times in the small hit game state, the interval period (closing period between openings) after the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened is 1.8 seconds. There is a period of closure. Since the feature unit 014IW is configured so that the degree of advantage differs depending on the small hit type, the opening effect during the small hit game (for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state) for each small hit type. The effect mode of the effect of notifying that the effect is to be performed) may be different (or the selection ratio of the effect mode may be different). For example, in the case of a small hit A that is opened three times (that is, a high degree of advantage), the effect mode B
In the case of a small hit C in which the open effect of the effect mode A is executed more frequently than the open effect of, and the open state is only once (that is, the degree of advantage is low), the effect is higher than the open effect of the effect mode A. The rate at which the open effect of aspect B is executed may be increased. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the production mode of the open effect, and it is possible to improve the interest.

In this feature unit 014IW, three types of small hits, small hit A, small hit B, and small hit C, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and only one type or two types are provided. It may be 4 or more types. Further, for example, when the open effect is executed during the small hit game only in the second KT state, any one of the small hit A, the small hit B, and the small hit C is configured in the second KT state. In the first KT state in which the small hit type is determined and the opening effect is not executed, the small hit type may be determined (or the rate of determination is high) in the small hit C. Due to such a configuration, the first KT in which the open effect is not executed
In the state, it is possible to prevent the period controlled by the small hit game state (that is, the period for stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol) from becoming long, which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

8-2 to 8-4 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol used in the feature unit 014IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 8-2 to 8-4 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-2 to 8-4, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol. 32 types of # 01 to # 32 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 0)
The terms 1 to 07 or 01 to 32) mean both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 8-2 (A). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 8-2 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability /
In the case of the first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown in FIG. 8-2 (B) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. Figure 8-
As shown in 2 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 8-3 (C). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 10 minutes. Further, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 10 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this feature unit 014IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning a game ball to the special winning opening. I will end up. Therefore, in this feature unit 014IW, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), non-K
Even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the T state, the fluctuation time is made extremely long and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is reduced so that the frequency of small hits is reduced, and the non-K
It prevents the situation where a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball even though it is in the T state. In the feature unit 014IW, the "frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than in the normal state.

In addition, in this feature unit 014IW, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the fluctuation time even if it is a big hit. By making the time relatively long, 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning a prize in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on any of the normal jackpots A to C that triggered the low probability / first KT state is ended. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 8-3 (D) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 04 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. It is determined. In addition, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this feature unit 014IW, as already explained,
When controlled to the 1st KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but the variable winning ball device 6B
By lengthening the opening time of, the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 17 is controlled in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in the present feature unit 014IW, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 can be used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when the big hit is determined as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, when the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 39th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on any of the normal jackpots A to C that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is executed, the fluctuations of the 41st to 64th fluctuations are executed. If you want to execute the display, or if you want to execute the variable display of the 66th to 89th fluctuations,
The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / 1st KT and 2-39, 41-64 or 66-89 variation shown in FIG. 8-3 (E) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 8-3 (E), as the 2nd to 39th, 41st to 64th or 66th to 89th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state after the jackpot game based on any of the normal jackpots A to C is completed. Second
When the variation display of the special symbol is executed, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 07 to # 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (E), 2 to 39, 41 to 64 or 66 in the low probability / first KT state after the jackpot game based on any of the normal jackpots A to C is completed.
When it is determined that the fluctuation time is out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 07 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern # 08 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second are determined. May be done. On the other hand, if it is determined that the low probability / 1st KT state 2 to 39, 41 to 64 or 66 to 89 fluctuations are out of order after the big hit game based on any of the normal big hits A to C is completed, the reach is reached. The second variation pattern # 09 may be determined. In addition, when it is determined that the small hit is a low probability / 1st KT state 2 to 39, 41 to 64 or 66 to 89 after the big hit game based on any of the normal big hits A to C is completed, the change is made. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation having a short time of 5 seconds or the second fluctuation pattern # 11 of the shortened fluctuation having a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second. On the other hand, after finishing the jackpot game based on any of the normal jackpots A to C, the probability is low / 2-3 in the first KT state.
When determining a small hit as the ninth, 41-64 or 66-89 variation, it may be determined in the second variation pattern # 12 with reach. The second fluctuation patterns # 07 and # 10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns # 08 and # 11 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. In addition, the probability is low / 1st KT after the jackpot game based on any of the normal jackpots A to C is completed.
When determining a jackpot as the 2-39, 41-64 or 66-89 variation of the state,
The second variation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, even if the case of executing the fluctuation display of the 40th, 65th, or 90th variation after the jackpot game based on any of the normal jackpots A to C that triggered the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 40th, 65th, or 90th variation shown in FIG. 8-3 (F) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 8-3 (F), the variation of the second special symbol as the 40th, 65th, or 90th variation of the low probability / first KT state after the jackpot game based on any of the normal jackpots A to C is completed. When the display is executed, it is determined to be one of the second fluctuation patterns # 14 to # 16.

In this feature unit 014IW, 40, 6 when controlled to the low probability / first KT state.
At the 5th and 90th fluctuations, a battle effect (details will be described later) that suggests whether or not the high base state (first KT state) is continued and whether or not to shift to the second KT state is executed. Therefore, in the 40th, 65th, and 90th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, FIG. 8-3 (F)
) Is used to ensure a sufficient period for executing the battle effect without selecting shortened variation using the variation pattern table for the second special symbol.

In addition, in this feature unit 014IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, when a big hit is made in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is displayed. It is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, The second executed during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol
Since the fluctuation of the special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player cannot receive any profit from the small hit. Therefore, in this feature unit 014IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, the game shifts to the jackpot game state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike this feature unit 014IW, even if the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first). If the game machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on any of the probabilistic jackpots B to F that triggered the high probability / first KT state is ended. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is to be executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 8-4 (G) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (G), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state, any one of the second fluctuation patterns # 17 to # 21 Will be decided.

As in the case of the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (G), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 17 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is out of order, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. In addition, Fig. 8-4
As shown in (G), when the jackpot is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

In addition, when the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 39th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on any of the probability variation jackpots B to F that triggered the high probability / 1st KT state is executed, the fluctuations of the 41st to 64th fluctuations are executed. If you want to execute the display, or if you want to execute the variable display of the 66th to 89th fluctuations,
The second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / 1st KT and 2-39, 41-64 or 66-89 variation shown in FIG. 8-4 (H) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # 22 to # 28 Is decided.

It should be noted that, as in the low probability / 1st KT state 2 to 39, 41 to 64 or 66 to 89 fluctuations, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (H), the high probability / 1st KT state 2 to 39, 41 ~ 64 or 6
When it is determined that the 6th to 89th fluctuations are out of order, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, which is the second shortened fluctuation.
Fluctuation pattern # 22 and the second fluctuation pattern # 23 of shortened fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1 second.
May be decided. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 39th, 41st to 64th or 66th to 89th fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state are out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 2 with reach is involved.
It may be decided to be 4. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 39th, 41st to 64th or 66th to 89th fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 25 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds, or Second fluctuation pattern # 2 of shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second
It may be decided to be 6. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 39th, 41st to 64th or 66th to 89th fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern with reach #
It may be decided to be 27. The second fluctuation patterns # 22 and # 25 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns # 23 and # 26
Is a variation pattern that can be selected only when one or more second reserved storages are stored. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Also, high probability / 1st K
When the jackpot is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the T state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

In addition, even if the case of executing the fluctuation display of the 40th, 65th, or 90th variation after the jackpot game based on any of the probability variation jackpots B to F that triggered the high-low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, the high probability shown in FIG. 8-4 (I) / at the first KT and 40, 65 or 90.
The second special symbol variation pattern table for the variation item is selected and the variation pattern is determined.
As shown in FIG. 8-4 (I), the variation of the second special symbol as the 40th, 65th, or 90th variation of the high probability / first KT state after the jackpot game based on any of the probability variation jackpots B to F is completed. When the display is executed, it is determined to be one of the second fluctuation patterns # 29 to # 31.

In this feature unit 014IW, 40, 6 when controlled to the high probability / first KT state.
At the 5th and 90th fluctuations, a battle effect (details will be described later) that suggests whether or not the high base state (first KT state) is continued and whether or not to shift to the second KT state is executed. Therefore, in the 40th, 65th, and 90th fluctuations of the high probability / first KT state, FIG. 8-4 (I)
) Is used to ensure a sufficient period for executing the battle effect without selecting shortened variation using the variation pattern table for the second special symbol.

When the feature unit 014 is controlled to the low probability / first KT state or the high probability / first KT state, the second variation shown in FIG. 8-4 (F) is shown at the 40th, 65th, and 90th fluctuations.
Using the variation pattern table for special symbols or the variation pattern table for second special symbols shown in FIG. 8-4 (I), the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16 or the second variation patterns # 29 to
Although it is configured to determine the variation pattern of any of # 31, the variation pattern is not limited to such a configuration, and a dedicated variation pattern used in the 40th, 65th, and 90th variation may be provided. In this case, dedicated fluctuation patterns used at the 40th, 65th, and 90th fluctuations are provided depending on whether the previous jackpot was a jackpot by the first special figure game or a jackpot by the second special figure game. Alternatively, dedicated fluctuation patterns used in the 40th, 65th, and 90th fluctuations corresponding to the jackpot type of the previous jackpot may be provided, respectively.

Further, the feature unit 014IW is configured to use the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table according to the number of fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state and the high probability / first KT state. For example, a common second special symbol variation pattern table may be used regardless of the number of variations.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 8-4 (j). Is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (j), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation patterns # 29 to # 3
It is decided to be one of 2.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (j), when it is determined to be out of order in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be the second variation pattern # 25 of the shortened variation with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds. May occur. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 30 with reach. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 31 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. Also, when determining a big hit in the high probability / second KT state,
The second variation pattern # 32 with reach is determined.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-3 and 8-4, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the second KT state. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, Fig. 8-5 (
1) shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, and FIG. 8-5 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device in the second KT state. 17 open patterns are shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 8-5 (1). As shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 executes the variable display of the normal symbol. When it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be off, the off symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. In the feature unit 014IW, since the normal symbol game is per 100% regardless of the game state, the normal symbol display 20 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, and the hit symbol is derived and displayed. Further, in this feature unit 014IW, FIG.
As shown in −5 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol is 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, FIG. 8-5
As shown in (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed and the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is used for 5.5 seconds. It is open and
A game ball can be won in the second start winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the game ball wins in the special winning opening. It will be possible. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is 0.5.
While the seconds are short, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened in the next normal symbol. Fluctuation time 0.
It is after at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, has elapsed. Therefore, in the feature unit 014IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the feature unit 014IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already open. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 8-5 (2). As shown in FIG. 8-5 (2), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 executes the variable display of the normal symbol. When it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be off, the off symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. In the feature unit 014IW, since the normal symbol game is per 100% regardless of the game state, the normal symbol display 20 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, and the hit symbol is derived and displayed. Further, in this feature unit 014IW, FIG.
As shown in −5 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol is 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, FIG. 8-5
As shown in (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed and the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is used for 0.2 seconds. It is open and
A game ball can be won in the second start winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the game ball wins in the special winning opening. It will be possible.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in the feature unit 014IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B
The interval period (closing period) after opening is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds + time before the second start winning opening opening process 2.6 seconds) A relatively long period of time is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that it is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and it is easy for the game ball to win the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in the special winning opening and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and in the second KT state, "small hit R".
A character display such as "USH" is displayed.

In this example, a small hit occurs only when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and the KT
In the state, by increasing the frequency of the variation display of the second special symbol, a small hit is likely to occur, and further, by providing a first KT state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball and a second KT state in which a prize ball is easily obtained. In particular, a small hit RUSH where a prize ball can be expected by a small hit (in this example, the second
The case where the KT state) is realized is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the first
Regardless of whether the variable display of the special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured so that if it is not a big hit, it will be a 100% small hit, and the variation of the first special symbol If it is a small hit on the display, it is difficult to get a prize ball, and if it is a small hit on the variable display of the second special symbol, it is easy to get a prize ball, so that a prize ball is expected by a small hit It may be configured to realize a small hit RUSH (a game state in which the game value is likely to increase due to the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol). As such, while there is a state in which the prize ball cannot be expected even in the same KT state in some form, it is sufficient that the state of the small hit RUSH in which the prize ball can be expected is realized.

Further, in the feature unit 014IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After the lapse of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol variation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 2.6 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled by. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in this feature unit 014IW, the variable display of a normal symbol is executed, and the variable winning ball device 6B
The process of opening control is the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, C).
It is performed by executing the normal symbol process process (see step S26) by PU103). Further, in the game control microcomputer 100, in the normal symbol process process in step S26, whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state (high probability state) and whether or not the game state is a non-K
Regardless of whether it is in the T state, the first KT state or the second KT state, or in the jackpot game state, it is determined with the same probability (for example, 100%) whether or not the hit is a normal figure.
That is, in this feature unit 014IW, it is determined that it is 100% per normal drawing regardless of the state.

In this feature unit 014IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same for each of 0.2 seconds in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. By shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state,
Although the case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is different is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is obtained by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state.
May be configured to be different. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. ..

As will be described later, in the feature unit 014IW, in the first KT state, by setting a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set, the high base state is controlled, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (1). As described above, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled so that the opening time is long. Further, in the second KT state, by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be short. ing.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, it is as shown in FIG. 8-5 (1). The variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a long time. If it is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) and the special flag is not set, the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 8-5 (2) is opened for a short time. It may be configured to control with a two-open pattern (short open). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, low probability / 1st KT
Of the 40 shortened fluctuation periods of the special symbol in the state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 39th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, low probability /
After the end of the first KT state, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort when the variable winning ball device 6B is long open when the left-handed hit notification is performed.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. Then, it is possible not to win the variable winning ball device 6B, and the probability is low / non-KT.
It is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during the state.

In this feature unit 014IW, as shown in FIG. 8-5, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2.
It is set to a short time of seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate By the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open, and the special winning opening can be won). On the other hand, in the feature unit 014IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Is set to start, so that it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

8-6 and 8-7 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 8-6, commands 8000 (H) to
8007 (H), 8011 (H) to 8030 (H) are effect control commands (variation pattern commands) for designating variation patterns of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of special symbols. Is. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8030 (H), the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (probability change jackpot A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the probability variation jackpot A. .. Command 9003
(H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (probability variation jackpot B designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the probability variation jackpot B. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (probability change jackpot C designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the probability variation jackpot C. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (probability change jackpot D designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the probability variation jackpot D. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (probability change jackpot E designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the probability variation jackpot E. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (probability change jackpot F designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the probability variation jackpot F. .. The command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (normal jackpot A designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the normal jackpot A. .. The command 9009 (H) is an effect control command (display result 9 designation command (normal jackpot B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the normal jackpot B. .. The command 9010 (H) is an effect control command (display result 10 designation command (normal jackpot C designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the normal jackpot C. .. The command 9011 (H) is an effect control command (display result 11 designation command (small hit A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the small hit A. .. Command 9012
(H) is an effect control command (display result 12 designation command (small hit B designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the small hit B. The command 9013 (H) is an effect control command (display result 13 designation command (small hit C designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the small hit C. ..

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 13 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this feature unit 014IW, the game control microcomputer 1
Since 00 transmits the display result specification command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is the first.
Since it can be determined that the display result specification command is for the special symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command is the display result specification command for the second special symbol, the display result specification command can be determined. Can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result specification command for the first special symbol and the display result specification command for the second special symbol may be separated.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the display result designation command, but the probability variation jackpot A / probability variation jackpot B / probability variation jackpot C / probability variation jackpot D / probability variation jackpot E / probability variation jackpot F / normal jackpot A / normal jackpot. B / Normal big hit C / Small hit A / Small hit B / Small hit C / Loss The variation pattern command is determined corresponding to each, and the effect control CPU 12
0 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved storage number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Command D000 (H) is in the first customer waiting state (the first special symbol has not been changed, and the command D000 (H) has not been changed.
This is an effect control command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) that specifies that the first hold memory is not stored). Command D001 (H) is in the second customer waiting state (second).
This is an effect control command (second customer waiting demo display designation command) that specifies that the special symbol has not been changed and the second hold memory is not stored). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. Command E001 (
H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first) that specifies the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state.
KT background specification command). Command E003 (H) has a high probability of playing / 2nd K
This is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display in the T state.

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 is a game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11.
When the above-mentioned effect control command is received from the above, the display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-7, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the voice control board 13 is changed. The sound number data is output to. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-7 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

8-8 and 8-9 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A, it means that the first special symbol display device 4A is not displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and This is the case even during the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 138IWS51).
A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display specification command is issued to the effect control CPU1.
Twenty (step 138IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 has RAM1.
Each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of 02 is read and stored in the first random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 138IWS53A), and the first reserved storage Decrease the number value by 1 (subtract the count value of the 1st reserved storage counter by 1) and shift the contents of each storage area (step 138IW).
S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first hold storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the first reserved storage numbers are always extracted is always the first reserved storage number = 1.
, 2, 3, 4 are in order. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 138IWS55A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability / first KT, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is executed. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, the command is high probability / first KT state. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / second KT state is determined and the high accuracy / second KT background specification command is executed. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 138IWS56A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing, step 014I without performing the processing after step 138IWS57A.
Move to WS001A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 138IWS56A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process shifts to step 138IWS58A. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether or not a random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, in the game machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 138IWS56A,
Random numbers for hit determination (random numbers for hit determination) without processing steps 138IWS57A to 138IWS62A
By setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range (which may be a random number common to the hit judgment random number used for the big hit judgment or a completely different random number) and performing the small hit judgment.
Regardless of which hit determination random number was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

If the jackpot of the second special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100
Reads a random number for hit determination from the first random number storage buffer (step 138IWS57A).
), The jackpot determination module is executed (step 138IWS58A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In step 138IWS58A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state. If you decide to make a big hit (
Step 138IWS59A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 138IWS60A). Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A to F or the normal jackpot A to C (step 138 IWS).
61A), memorize the jackpot type (step 138IWS62A), step 014IWS
Move to 001A.

Further, when the big hit is not made in step 138IWS59A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 138IWS6).
3A). In the small hit judgment module, a random number for hit judgment (a random number for small hit judgment may be used),
It is a program that decides to make a small hit if it matches a predetermined small hit judgment value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 138IWS64A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 138IWS64A). Step 138 IWS65A). Also,
The small hit type is either small hit A, small hit B, or small hit C based on a random number for determining the hit type (a random number for determining the small hit type different from the random number for determining the large hit type). Is determined (step 138IWS66A), and the small hit type is stored (step 138IW).
S67A), the process proceeds to step 014IWS001A.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), since the small hit determination value is not assigned to the small hit determination table 138IW130b for the first special symbol, step 138I
In WS63A, the game control microcomputer 100 decides not to make a small hit (make it a miss) with a 100% probability.

Not limited to the processing mode shown in this example, for example, when it is decided not to make a big hit, step 014 is unconditionally performed without performing a lottery process for whether or not to make a small hit.
By shifting to IWS001A, it may be configured so that there is a 100% probability of deviation. With such a configuration, the processing of steps 138IWS63A to S67A becomes unnecessary. Further, if it is decided not to make a big hit, it may be decided to make a small hit with a low probability.

In step 014IWS001A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0", and if it is "0" (Y in step 014IWS001A), the process proceeds to step 014IWS009A. Transition. If the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, low probability / first KT state or high probability / first
When the KT state is controlled and the first transition condition is set, the CPU 103 subtracts the value of the high base number counter by "1" (step 014IWS002A) and determines whether or not the value has reached "0". (Step 014IWS003A). The value of the high base count counter is "0"
If it does not, the process proceeds to step 014IWS009A, and if the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the CPU 103 resets the high base flag indicating that the high base state is set (step 014IWS004A). ). Further, the CPU 103 sets an extension flag indicating that the control similar to that in the high base state is extended for the ordinary electric accessory (step 014IWS005A).

Next, the CPU 103 starts from the first KT state to the second when the set transition condition is satisfied.
It is confirmed whether or not the second KT transition flag indicating the transition to the KT state is set (step 014IWS006A). If the second KT transition flag is not set, the CPU 103 resets the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the reduction control of the variation display of the special symbol is in progress (step 014IWS007A). And step 014IWS009
Move to A. On the other hand, when the second KT transition flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second KT transition flag (step 014IWS008A). Then, the process proceeds to step 014IWS009A.

In this feature unit 014IW, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed by the low probability / high base state at the end of the big hit game based on any of the normal big hits A to C. High probability / high base when the fluctuation display is executed 40 times, 65 times or 90 times under the control of (low probability / 1st KT state) and at the end of the big hit game based on any of the probabilistic big hits B to F. Controlled by the state (high probability / 1st KT state) 40 times, 6
This is the case where the variable display is executed 5 times or 90 times.

Then, when the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit A, when the 90th variation display is executed, the big hit game based on the normal big hit B is executed. If the 65th variation display is executed when the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled after the end of the normal jackpot C, the low probability / high base state after the end of the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot C. When controlled to (low probability / first KT state), when the 40th fluctuation display is executed, Y is Y in steps 014IWS003A and S003B.
The high base flag is reset in steps 014IWS004A and S004B, and the special time reduction flag is also reset in steps 014IWS007A and S007B to shift to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)). become.

In addition, when the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled after the big hit game based on any of the probability variation big hits B, E, and F is executed, the 90th variation display is executed. High probability / high base state (high probability / high probability / after the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit C
When controlled to the 1st KT state), when the 65th variation display is executed, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / 1st KT state) after the end of the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit D. In this case, when the 40th variation display is executed, step 014IWS003A
, S003B determines Y and steps 014IWS004A, S004B reset the high base flag, while the special time reduction flag is not reset and the high probability / low base state (
It will shift to high probability / second KT state).

In step 014IWS009A, when the first small hit flag is set in the CPU 103 (Y in step 014IWS009A), the CPU 103 indicates the number of small hits in which the small hit gaming state required to satisfy the second transition condition is generated. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is "0" (step 014IWS010A), and when it is "0", that is, the second
If the migration condition is not set, the process proceeds to step 138IWS68A. When the value of the small hit count counter is not "0", that is, after the big hit game based on either the probability variation big hit E or F is completed, the high probability / first KT state (first KT state B) is controlled and the second transition is made. When the condition is set, the CPU 103 subtracts the value of the small hit count counter by "1" (step 014IWS011A) and determines whether or not the value is "0" (step 0).
14IWS012A). If the value of the small hit count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 138IWS68A, and if it becomes "0", the CPU 103 resets the high base flag (step 014IWS013A) and sets the extension flag. (Step 0
14IWS014A), reset the 2nd KT transition flag (step 014IWS01)
5A). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS68A.

In this feature unit 014IW, the high base flag is set and the number of occurrences of the small hit game state in the high base state is managed with high probability / high at the end of the big hit game based on either the probability variation big hit E or F. This is the case where the control is performed in the base state (high probability / first KT state).

Then, when the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled after the end of the big hit game based on any of the probability change big hit E, the probability change occurs when the 30th small hit game state occurs. When the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled after the end of the big hit game based on the big hit F, when the 70th small hit game state occurs,
Step 014IWS012A, S012B is determined to be Y, and step 014IWS01
While the high base flag is reset in 3A and S013B, the special figure time saving flag is not reset, and the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

Then, in step 138IWS68A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 138IWS68A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 138IWS68A is confirmed.

In this feature unit 014IW, step 014IWS001 in the first special symbol normal processing
The number of times (4) corresponding to the first transition condition set by the processing of A to 014IWS015A.
When starting the variation display of the 0th, 65th or 90th time, or when starting the variation display which is the small hit of the number of times (30th or 70th time) corresponding to the set second transition condition. The high base flag is reset and configured to transition from the high base state to the low base state. On the other hand, in this feature unit 014IW, 40, 65 in the high base state.
And during the 90th fluctuation display, a battle effect (details will be described later) that suggests whether or not the high base state will continue and whether or not to shift to the small hit RUSH will be executed. ing. Therefore, for example, when the high base flag is reset at the start of the 40th, 65th, and 90th fluctuations and the operation mode (specifically, the opening time and the opening time) of the normal electric accessory changes, before the battle effect ends. In addition, there is a risk that the player will know that the high base state will end. Therefore, in this feature unit 014IW, step 014IWS004
A and S013A reset the high base flag and step 014IWS
The extension flag is set in 005A and S014A, and when the extension flag is set, in steps 138IWS3704 to S3706 of the normal symbol stop processing described later and steps 138IWS3803 to S3705 of the normal electric accessory opening pretreatment, the normal electric It is configured to perform the same control as in the high base state regarding the opening of the accessory. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the high base state will end. The extension flag is set in step 138IW201 of the first special symbol stop processing.
It is reset at 4A.

Not limited to the configuration shown by the feature unit 014IW, when the variable display of the number of times (40th, 65th, or 90th) corresponding to the set first transition condition is finished, or the set second When the variable display (or small hit game state) that is the small hit of the number of times (30th or 70th) corresponding to the transition condition is finished, the high base flag is reset and the state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. It may be configured to do so.

FIG. 8-10 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, first, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set with the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. (Step 138IWS1700A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the variation display of the second special symbol by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol (Fig. 8-2). ~ Fig. 8-4), a small hit is likely to occur, so the state is controlled to the KT state. Unless the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is
As a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern, the non-K shown in FIG. 8-2 (A)
Select the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for T time (step 138IWS170)
1A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the KT shown in FIG. 8-2 (B) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected (step 138IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is described in step 138IWS1701A,
Which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 8-2 is used based on the fluctuation pattern table decided to be used in S1702A and the fluctuation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. (Step 138 IWS 1703A). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (
Step 138 IWS1704A).

Further, in step 138IWS1703A, the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol
When the determination is made, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and starts the measurement of the fluctuation time (step 138IWS1705A), and the first special symbol display device. The variation display of the first special symbol in 4A is started (step 138IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 138IWS1707A).

FIG. 8-11 shows the first special symbol variation process (step S) in the first special symbol process process.
It is a flowchart which shows 112A). In the first special symbol variation processing, CPU103
First, if it has not been transmitted yet, it controls to transmit one of the display result specification commands to the effect control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not to make a big hit and the decision result of the big hit type. (Step 138IWS1120A).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the fluctuation interruption flag indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is interrupted (interruption of the measurement of the variation time) is set (step 138IWS1121A), and sets it. If not, subtract 1 from the first variable time timer (
In step 138IWS1122A), when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 138IWS1123A), control is performed to send a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 138IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 138IWS1125A).

If the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 138I).
WS1126A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. 2nd Indicates that a big hit will be made based on the variable display of the special symbol.
It can be determined by checking whether or not the jackpot flag is set. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 will perform step 138I.
The process shifts to WS1124A to control the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 138IWS1124A), and the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A). Update (step 138)
IWS1125A).

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 10
3 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B (
Step 138 IWS1127A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 will display the small hit symbol.
Confirm whether the jackpot of the first special symbol is changing (step 138IWS1128A).
If the jackpot is fluctuating, the process proceeds to step 138IWS1124A and the effect control CPU.
Control is performed to send a symbol confirmation designation command to 120 (step 138IWS1124A).
), And the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A).
) Is updated (step 138IWS1125A). Also, step 138
Before executing the process of IWS1125A, the CPU 103 resets the first jackpot flag. On the other hand, if the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation interruption flag (step 138IWS1129A).

If the fluctuation interruption flag is set in step 138IWS1121A, C
The PU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B (step 138IWS1130A), and if the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed, the fluctuation interruption flag is reset (step). 138IWS1131A).

By executing the process of step 138IWS1126A, the feature unit 014I
In W, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol,
The variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Also, step 138IWS1127A
By executing the process of ~ 138IWS1128A, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, the variation display of the first special symbol is forced. When it is stopped and a small hit occurs as a display result of the variation display of the second special symbol, a situation in which a big hit occurs as a display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is prevented from occurring. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the variation display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step S111A. It is controlled so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

Further, by executing the processes of steps 138IWS1127A to 138IWS1129A, the feature unit 014IW executes if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol which is out of order. Suspend the variable display of the 1st special symbol inside (
It is configured to interrupt the measurement of fluctuation time). If a small hit is provided as the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol, the first is performed during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol.
If the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, the variation display of the second special symbol may be forcibly stopped or interrupted (measurement of the variation time is interrupted).

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 138)
N) of IWS1125A, the process is terminated as it is.

FIG. 8-12 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 resets if the extension flag is set (step 138IWS2014A), and causes the first special symbol display device 4A to derive and display the stop symbol of the first special symbol (step 138IWS2015A). ). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 138IWS201).
6A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 has a jackpot signal 1 (a signal indicating that a jackpot game is in progress) and a jackpot signal 2 (a signal indicating that a consecutive villa is in progress).
Set the jackpot signal output flag indicating that the output is external (step 138IWS2).
022A). In this feature unit 014IW, based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in step 138IWS2022A, the information output process (step S23) is executed, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and the jackpot signal 2 If the external output of the jackpot signal 2 is not in progress, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before opening the big winning opening (step 138IWS20).
24A), set the open pattern data for Round 1 according to the jackpot type (step 1)
38IWS2025A), set "1" to the round number counter indicating the number of jackpot rounds (step 138IWS2026A), and set the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step 138IWS2027A). ..

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 138IWS2016A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 014IWS050A).

When the first small hit flag is set (Y in step 014IWS050A)
, CPU 103 sets a timer before opening the special winning opening (step 014IWS051A).
, Set the special winning opening opening pattern data according to the small hit type (step 014IWS)
052A), the small hit start designation command is transmitted (step 014IWS053A), and the first
Set the value of the special figure process flag to the value corresponding to the first small hit release preprocessing (step 01).
4IWS054A).

If the first small hit flag is not set (N in step 014IWS050A)
), The CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 138IWS2028A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. ing.

However, in this example, the right-handed notification and the launch promotion notification are not executed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, and the right-handed notification is given when the game ball wins the first start winning opening in that state. Or launch promotion notification (in this case, since the gate is waiting to pass, even if the game ball wins the first start winning opening, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and the first hold memory is stored. Will be).

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Therefore, the player may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to launch and operate the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, loud sound output or It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by (large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. , For players who intentionally perform right-handed operations
It may be configured to give a left-handed notification according to a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is high.
With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, the passage gate 4
In 1, when a game ball is detected multiple times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and a specific number less than a predetermined number in the second start winning opening and the special winning opening. It may be configured to give a left-handed notification when (for example, one) or more game balls are detected.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the gate passage designation command in the normal state (low probability state), the left-handed notification process is executed, and the first effective start A prize designation command or the first effective start A prize designation command is executed in the state where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. When the general winning opening winning designation command is received, the right-handed notification process may be executed.

Further, for example, the detection of the game ball at the passing gate 41 does not output an external signal, while the detection of the game ball at the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is configured to output an external signal. You may.

In this feature unit 014IW, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S114A) in the first special symbol process process. In the process of waiting for passing through the first gate, CPU1
03 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 13).
8IWS2501A). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 10
If set, 3 is a probability change flag indicating that the state is a probability change state, a high base flag, and the like.
The special figure time reduction flag and the second KT transition flag are reset, and the values of the high base count counter and the small hit count counter are cleared to 0 (step 138IWS2504A). Then CPU10
3 transmits the first jackpot start designation command (step 138IWS2505A), and the first
Set the value of the special figure process flag to the value corresponding to the first jackpot release preprocessing (step 13).
8IWS2506A).

In the feature unit 014IW, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol by executing the first gate passage waiting process, but the passage gate 41 The game is configured to shift to a big hit game on condition that the game ball has passed through and detected by the gate switch 21.

8-14 and 8-15 are flowcharts showing a first jackpot end process (step S118A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first jackpot end process
The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 138).
IWS2200A), step 138 when the jackpot end display timer is set
Move to IWS2204A. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first
The jackpot flag is reset (step 138IWS2201A), and control is performed to send the first jackpot end designation command (step 138IWS2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed in the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step 138IWS2203A).
), End the process.

In step 138IWS2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 138IWS2204A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 138IWS2205A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (Y in step 138IWS2205A), CP
U103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is probabilistic jackpot A (step 138IWS2206A). Whether or not the probability variation jackpot A is determined can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step 138IWS62A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a probability change jackpot A, the CPU 103 sets a probability change flag indicating that it is in a probability change state and shifts to a probability change state (high probability state) (step 138IWS2207A).
At the same time, the special symbol time reduction flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened is set to shift to the KT state (step 138IWS2208A). And step 138I
Move to WS2223A. In the case of the probability variation jackpot A, since the high base flag is not set, it is controlled to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

If it is not the probability variation jackpot A, the CPU 103 has the probability variation jackpot B as the type of jackpot that has ended this time.
It is confirmed whether or not it is any of ~ F (step 014IWS100A). Whether or not it is any of the probabilistic jackpots B to F is determined by, for example, step 13 of the first special symbol normal processing.
It can be determined by confirming the jackpot type stored in 8IWS62A. Probability change jackpot B ~
If it is any of F, the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step 014IWS101A), and sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 014IWS102A). , Further, the special figure time reduction flag is set to shift to the KT state (step 014IWS103A). Therefore, the probability variation jackpot B ~
If it is any of F, it will be controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

Further, the CPU 103 sets a value of 90, 65 or 40 in the high base number counter according to the jackpot type (step 014IWS104A). Specifically, the probability variation jackpot B,
In either case of E or F, "90" is set in the high base count counter, in the case of probability variation jackpot C, "65" is set in the high base count counter, and in the case of probability variation jackpot D, "65" is set. ,
Set "40" to the high base count counter. Further, the CPU 103 sets the second KT transition flag (step 014IWS015A).

Further, when the type of the jackpot completed this time is either the probability variation jackpot E or F (Y in step 014IWS106A), the CPU 103 sets a value of 30 or 70 in the small hit count counter according to the jackpot type. (Step 014IWS107A). Specifically, in the case of the probability variation jackpot E, "30" is set in the small hit count counter, and the probability variation jackpot F
In the case of, "70" is set in the small hit count counter. And step 138 IW
Shift to S2223A.

Step 014 By the processing of IWS100A to S105A, when any of the probability variation jackpots B to F, the high base number counter and the second KT transition flag are set. That is, the first transition condition is set. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on any of the probabilistic jackpots B to F is completed, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled, and the value of the high base count counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. Therefore, it is determined as N in step 014IWS001A of the first special symbol stop processing, and step 014IWS.
The subtraction process of the high base number counter of 002A is performed. Then, until the next big hit occurs or the set first transition condition is satisfied, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first K)
(T state) will be maintained. In addition, when the set first transition condition is satisfied,
The transition from the first KT state to the second KT state will occur.

Further, by the processing of steps 014IWS106A to S107A, if any of the probabilistic big hits E and F, the small hit count counter is further set. That is, the second transition condition is also set. Therefore, among the probabilistic jackpots B to F, in the case of the probabilistic jackpots E and F, the probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled after the jackpot game is completed, and when a small hit occurs thereafter. Since the value of the small hit count counter is not 0, the first
Step 014IWS010A of special symbol stop processing determines N and step 014IW
The subtraction process of the small hit count counter of S011A is performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs or one of the set transition conditions of the first transition condition and the second transition condition is satisfied. Will be done. Also,
When either the first transition condition or the second transition condition is satisfied, the transition from the first KT state to the second KT state is performed. With such a configuration, if it is any of the probability variation jackpots B to D, it is controlled to the first KT state A, and if it is any of the probability variation jackpots E and F, it is controlled to the first KT state B. Will be done.

If it is neither of the probabilistic jackpots B to F (that is, if it is any of the normal jackpots A to C), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 014IWS108A). Set the time saving flag and shift to the KT state (
Step 014 IWS109A). Further, the CPU 103 sets a value of 90, 65 or 40 in the high base number counter according to the jackpot type (step 014IWS110A).
). Specifically, in the case of normal jackpot A, "90" is set in the high base count counter, and in the case of normal jackpot B, "65" is set in the high base count counter, and normal jackpot C is set.
In the case of, "40" is set in the high base number counter. And step 138I
Move to WS2223A. Therefore, in the case of any of the normal jackpots A to C, the control is performed in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state). Further, in the case of any of the normal jackpots A to C, the value is set in the high base count counter (that is, the first transition condition is set), and the high base count counter is displayed in the subsequent fluctuation display. Since the value is not 0, N in step 014IWS001A of the first special symbol stop processing.
Is determined, and the subtraction process of the high base number counter in step 014IWS002A is performed. Then, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the first transition condition is satisfied. Further, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the transition from the first KT state to the non-KT state is performed.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step S110A) (step 138IWS2223A).

8-16 and 8-17 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol normal processing in the second special symbol process processing. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, the second
In the special symbol display device 4B, the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner.
In addition, it is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is in progress.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 138IWS51).
B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed.

If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display specification command is issued to the effect control CPU1.
Twenty (step 138IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 has RAM1.
Each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of 02 is read out and stored in the second random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 138IWS53B), and the second reserved storage. Decrease the value of the number by 1 (subtract the count value of the second reserved storage counter by 1) and shift the contents of each storage area (step 138 IW).
S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is always extracted is always the second reserved storage number = 1.
, 2, 3, 4 are in order. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 138 IWS55B). In addition, it should be noted.
The specific method of sending the background specification command is step 138IW of the first special symbol normal processing.
This is the same as the process shown in S55A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 138IWS56B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is changing, step 014I without performing the processing after step 138IWS57B.
Move to WS001B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress in step 138IWS56B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process shifts to step 138IWS58B. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether or not a random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress in step 138IWS56B, the hit determination random number (a random number common to the hit determination random number used for the jackpot determination) without performing the processes of steps 138IWS57B to S62B. It may be a completely different random number)
By setting a random number value (fixed value) of the deviation and performing a small hit judgment, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which hit judgment random number was acquired at the time of the start winning. ..

If the jackpot of the first special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100
Reads a random number for hit determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 138IWS57B).
), The jackpot determination module is executed (step 138IWS58B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In step 138IWS58B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state. If you decide to make a big hit (
Step 138IWS59B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 138IWS60B). Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A to F or the normal jackpot A to C (step 138 IWS).
61B), memorize the jackpot type (step 138IWS62B), step 014IWS
Move to 001B.

If the big hit is not made in step 138IWS59B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 138IWS6).
3B). In the small hit judgment module, a random number for hit judgment (a random number for small hit judgment may be used),
It is a program that decides to make a small hit if it matches a predetermined small hit judgment value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 138IWS64B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 138IWS64B). Step 138 IWS65B). Also,
The small hit type is either small hit A, small hit B, or small hit C based on a random number for determining the hit type (a random number for determining the small hit type different from the random number for determining the large hit type). Is determined (step 138IWS66B), and the small hit type is stored (step 138IW).
S67B), and the process proceeds to step 014IWS001B.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (C), when the small hit determination table 138IW130c for the second special symbol is not determined to be a large hit, it is determined to be a small hit. In addition to this, it is configured so that it may be out of order, but if it is not determined to be a big hit, it may be decided to make a small hit with a 100% probability. In this case, not limited to the processing mode shown in this example, for example, when it is decided not to make a big hit, the second unconditionally as it is without performing a lottery processing as to whether or not to make a small hit. By setting the small hit flag, it may be configured to be a small hit with a 100% probability. With such a configuration, the processing of steps 138IWS63B to S67B becomes unnecessary. Further, if it is decided not to make a big hit, it may be decided to make a deviation with a low probability.

In step 014IWS001B, the CPU 103 has a high base count counter value of "
It is determined whether or not it is "0", and if it is "0" (Y in step 014IWS001B),
Step 014 Transition to IWS009B. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, when it is controlled to the low probability / first KT state or the high probability / first KT state and the first transition condition is set, the CPU 103 has a high base. The value of the count counter is subtracted by "1" (step 014IWS002B), and it is determined whether or not the value is "0" (step 0).
14IWS003B). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 014IWS009B, and if the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the CPU 103 resets the high base flag (step). 014IWS004B), set the extension flag (step 014IWS005B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second KT transition flag is set (
Step 014IWS006B). If the 2nd KT transition flag is not set,
The CPU 103 resets the special figure time reduction flag (step 014IWS007B). Then, the process proceeds to step 014IWS009B. On the other hand, when the second KT transition flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second KT transition flag (step 01).
4IWS008B). Then, the process proceeds to step 014IWS009B.

In step 014IWS009B, when the first small hit flag is set (Y in step 014IWS009B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the small hit count counter is "0" (step). 014IWS010B), "0", that is, when the second transition condition is not set, step 138IWS
Move to 68B. When the value of the small hit count counter is not "0", that is, after the big hit game based on either the probability variation big hit E or F is completed, the high probability / first KT state (first KT state B) is controlled and the second transition is made. When the condition is set, the CPU 103 subtracts the value of the small hit count counter by "1" (step 014IWS011B) and determines whether or not the value is "0" (step 014IWS012B). If the value of the small hit count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 138IWS68B, and if it becomes "0", CP
The U103 resets the high base flag (step 014IWS013B), sets the extension flag (step 014IWS014B), and resets the second KT transition flag (step 014IWS014B).
Step 014IWS015B). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS68B.

Then, in step 138IWS68B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 138IWS68B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 138IWS68B is confirmed.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 8-10. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 8-10, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first steps 138.
Perform the same processing as the IWS1700A, and confirm whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 8-3 (C) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 fluctuates according to whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of fluctuations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, any of the variation pattern tables for the second special symbol for KT shown in FIGS. 8-3 (D) to 8-4 (j) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first variation is the second variation shown in FIG. 8-3 (D).
If the variation pattern table for special symbols is selected and the variation is 2-39, 41-64 or 66-89 after the jackpot game based on any of the normal jackpots A to C is completed, FIG. 8-3 (
If the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in E) is selected and the 40th, 65th, or 90th variation is obtained after the jackpot game based on any of the normal jackpots A to C is completed, FIG. 8-3 (F).
) Is selected for the second special symbol variation pattern table. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-4 (G). Select a pattern table, 2-39
For the 41st to 64th or 66th to 89th variation, select the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-4 (H), and for the 40th, 65th or 90th variation, FIG. 8-4 (I). ) Is selected for the second special symbol variation pattern table. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 8-4 (j) is selected.

The second special symbol variation process is the first special symbol variation process (step S11) shown in FIG. 8-11.
It is the same as 2A). That is, in the first special symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 8-11, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol variation processing is explained. In addition, it should be noted.
In the feature unit 014IW, since a small hit is not provided as a display result of the variation display of the first special symbol, in the second special symbol variation process, among the first special symbol variation processes shown in FIGS. 8-11, the step 138IW1121A, step 138IW1127A to step 138IW
The process corresponding to 1131A may be omitted.

FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 resets if the extension flag is set (step 138IWS2014B), and causes the second special symbol display device 4B to derive and display the stop symbol of the second special symbol (step 138IWS2015B). ). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 138IWS201).
6B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 138IWS2021B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), step 13 as it is.
Move to 8IWS2024B.

If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the CPU 10
3 sets the jackpot signal output flag (step 138IWS2022B). In this feature unit 014IW, based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in step 138IWS2022B, the information output process (step S23) is executed, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and the jackpot signal 2 If the external output of the jackpot signal 2 is not in progress, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before opening the big winning opening (step 138IWS20).
24B), set the open pattern data for Round 1 according to the jackpot type (step 1)
38IWS2025B), set "1" to the round number counter (step 138IW)
S2026B), the value of the second special figure process flag is set to a value corresponding to the second gate passage waiting process (step 138IWS2027B).

When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 138IWS2016B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 014IWS050B).

When the second small hit flag is set (Y in step 014IWS050B)
, CPU 103 sets a timer before opening the special winning opening (step 014IWS051B).
, Set the special winning opening opening pattern data according to the small hit type (step 014IWS)
052B), the small hit start designation command is transmitted (step 014IWS053B), and the second
Set the value of the special figure process flag to the value corresponding to the second small hit release preprocessing (step 01).
4IWS054B).

If the second small hit flag is not set (N in step 014IWS050B)
), The CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 138IWS2028B).

FIG. 8-19 is a flowchart showing a second gate passage waiting process in the second special symbol process process. In the second gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 138IWS2501B).
If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 138IWS2502B). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), step 138 IW as it is.
Move to S2504B.

If the special time reduction flag is not set (that is, unless it is in the KT state), CP
U103 sets the jackpot signal output flag (step 138IWS2503B).
In the feature unit 014IW, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in step 138IWS2503B, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and the jackpot signal 2 If the external output is not in progress, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, if set, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, the special figure time reduction flag, and the second KT transition flag, and clears the values of the high base count counter and the small hit count counter to 0 (step 138IWS2504B). ). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a second jackpot start designation command (step 138IWS2505B), and sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second jackpot release preprocessing (step 138I).
WS2506B).

In the feature unit 014IW, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the second gate passage waiting process, but the passage gate 41 On the condition that the game ball passes through and is detected by the gate switch 21, the game is configured to shift to the big hit game.

8-20 and 8-21 are flowcharts showing the second big hit end process in the second special symbol process process. In the second jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 138IWS2200B), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 138IWS2204B. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step 138IWS2201B), and control is performed to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step 138IWS2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed in the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step 138IWS2203B), and the process is terminated.

In step 138IWS2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 138IWS2204B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 138IWS2205B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (Y in step 138IWS2205B), CP
U103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is probabilistic jackpot A (step 138IWS2206B). Whether or not the probability variation jackpot A is determined can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step 138IWS62B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is the probability change jackpot A, the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag and the probability change state (probability change state (
Along with the transition to the high probability state (step 138IWS2207B), the special figure time reduction flag is set to shift to the KT state (step 138IWS2208B). Then, the process proceeds to step 138 IWS2223B. In the case of the probability variation jackpot A, since the high base flag is not set, it is controlled to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

If it is not the probability variation jackpot A, the CPU 103 has the probability variation jackpot B as the type of jackpot that has ended this time.
It is confirmed whether or not it is any of ~ F (step 014IWS100B). Whether or not it is any of the probabilistic jackpots B to F is determined by, for example, step 13 of the second special symbol normal processing.
It can be determined by confirming the jackpot type stored in 8IWS62B. Probability change jackpot B ~
If it is any of F, the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step 014IWS101B), and sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 014IWS102B). , Further, the special figure time reduction flag is set to shift to the KT state (step 014IWS103B). Therefore, the probability variation jackpot B ~
If it is any of F, it will be controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

Further, the CPU 103 sets a value of 90, 65 or 40 in the high base number counter according to the jackpot type (step 014IWS104B). Specifically, the probability variation jackpot B,
In either case of E or F, "90" is set in the high base count counter, in the case of probability variation jackpot C, "65" is set in the high base count counter, and in the case of probability variation jackpot D, "65" is set. ,
Set "40" to the high base count counter. Further, the CPU 103 sets the second KT transition flag (step 014IWS015B).

Further, when the type of the jackpot completed this time is either the probability variation jackpot E or F (Y in step 014IWS106B), the CPU 103 sets a value of 30 or 70 in the small hit count counter according to the jackpot type. (Step 014 IWS107B). Specifically, in the case of the probability variation jackpot E, "30" is set in the small hit count counter, and the probability variation jackpot F
In the case of, "70" is set in the small hit count counter. And step 138 IW
Move to S2223B.

Step 014 By the processing of IWS100B to S105B, when any of the probability variation jackpots B to F, the high base number counter and the second KT transition flag are set. That is, the first transition condition is set. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on any of the probabilistic jackpots B to F is completed, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled, and the value of the high base count counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. Therefore, it is determined as N in step 014IWS001B of the second special symbol stop processing, and step 014IWS.
The subtraction process of the high base number counter of 002B is performed. Then, until the next big hit occurs or the set first transition condition is satisfied, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first K)
(T state) will be maintained. In addition, when the set first transition condition is satisfied,
The transition from the first KT state to the second KT state will occur.

Further, by the processing of steps 014IWS106B to S107B, if any of the probabilistic big hits E and F, the small hit count counter is further set. That is, the second transition condition is set. Therefore, among the probabilistic jackpots B to F, in the case of the probabilistic jackpots E and F, the probability is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and when a small hit occurs thereafter. Since the value of the small hit count counter is not 0, the second
It is determined as N in step 014IWS010B of the special symbol stop processing, and step 014IW
The subtraction process of the small hit count counter of S011B is performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs or one of the set transition conditions of the first transition condition and the second transition condition is satisfied. Will be. Further, when either one of the set first transition condition and the second transition condition is satisfied, the transition from the first KT state to the second KT state is performed. Therefore, if it is any of the probabilistic jackpots B to D, it is controlled to the first KT state A, and if it is any of the probabilistic jackpots E and F, it is controlled to the first KT state B. Become.

If it is neither of the probabilistic jackpots B to F (that is, it is not a normal jackpot B or C in the variation display of the second special symbol, so if it is a normal jackpot A), the CPU 103 sets a high base flag and is high. With the transition to the base state (step 014IWS108B)
The special figure time reduction flag is set to shift to the KT state (step 014IWS109B). Further, the CPU 103 sets a value of 90 in the high base number counter (step 014I).
WS110B). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS2223A. Therefore, in the case of a normal jackpot A, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state). Further, in the case of a normal jackpot A, a value is set in the high base count counter (that is, the first transition condition is set), and the value of the high base count counter is not 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. Step 014IWS001B of the second special symbol stop processing
Is determined to be N, and the subtraction process of the high base number counter in step 014IWS002B is performed. Then, until the next big hit occurs or the set first transition condition is satisfied.
The low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) will be maintained. Further, when the set first transition condition is satisfied, the transition from the first KT state to the non-KT state is performed.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 138IWS2223B).

Here, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 014IW will be described. FIG. 8-22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in the feature unit 014IW. In FIG. 8-22, among the arrows indicating the transition of the gaming state, the solid line arrow indicates the transition of the gaming state triggered by the end of the jackpot game of the corresponding jackpot type. Further, the broken line arrow indicates the transition of the gaming state triggered by the establishment of the first transition condition of executing the variation display a predetermined time in the first KT state A or the first KT state C. Also, the dotted arrow indicates
The transition of the gaming state triggered by the establishment of either the first transition condition of executing the fluctuation display of a predetermined time in the first KT state B or the second transition condition of generating the small hit game state of a predetermined time. Is shown.

First, in the feature unit 014IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, the probabilistic big hits A to F and the normal big hits A to C are mainly generated.

As shown in FIG. 8-22, when the probability variation jackpot A occurs in the low probability / low base state, it shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. High probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (step 138 IW)
(See S2206A to S2208A, etc.).

In addition, when any of the probability variation jackpots B to D occurs in the low probability / low base state, the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game.
The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the first transition condition of executing the variable display of the number of times according to the big hit type is satisfied (steps 014IWS001B to 0).
See 14IWS008B, steps 014IWS100A-014IWS105A, etc.).

In addition, when either the probability variation jackpot E or F occurs in the low probability / low base state, it shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game.
Either the next big hit occurs or the first transition condition of executing the variable display of the number of times according to the big hit type and the second transition condition of generating the small hit gaming state of the number of times according to the big hit type. High probability / high base state is maintained until the transition condition is met (step 014IWS)
001B to 014IWS015B, Step 014IWS100A to 014IWS107
See A etc.).

In addition, when any of the normal jackpots A to C occurs in the low probability / low base state, the mode shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game.
The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the first transition condition of executing the variable display of the number of times according to the big hit type is satisfied (steps 014IWS001B to 0).
See 14IWS007B, steps 014IWS109A-014IWS110A, etc.).

After shifting to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in this feature unit 014IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. To launch the game ball (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, the probabilistic big hits A to F and the normal big hit A mainly occur.

As shown in FIG. 8-22, when the probability variation jackpot A occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the high probability / low base state (high probability / high probability /) occurs after the jackpot game ends. The second KT state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 138IWS2206B to S2208B, etc.).

In addition, when any of the probability variation jackpots B to D occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability / high probability / high probability / high base state) after the end of the jackpot game.
The high probability / high base state is maintained until the transition to the first KT state) and the first transition condition of executing the variation display of the number of times according to the jackpot type is satisfied (step 014IWS001B ~). 014IWS008B, Step 014IWS100B-014
IWS105B etc.).

In addition, when either the probability variation jackpot E or F occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability / high probability /) occurs after the jackpot game ends.
(1st KT state), the next big hit occurs, or the first transition condition is to execute the variable display of the number of times according to the big hit type, and the second is the occurrence of the small hit game state of the number of times according to the big hit type. The high probability / high base state is maintained until one of the transition conditions is satisfied (steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS015B, step 014IWS10).
0B to 014IWS107B and the like). In this feature unit 014IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot (that is, any of the probabilistic jackpots B to F) is 50% in total (FIG. 8). -1 (Refer to (E)), once the high probability / high base state is reached, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%.

In addition, when a normal jackpot A (normal jackpots B and C do not occur when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed) occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). , After the end of the big hit game, it shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and it is low until the next big hit occurs or the first transition condition of executing the fluctuation display 90 times is satisfied. Probability / high base state is maintained (steps 014IWS001B-014IWS0)
07B, see steps 014IWS108B to 014IWS110B, etc.).

Further, in this feature unit 014IW, when any of the probabilistic big hits B to D occurs and the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game, the next big hit occurs. If the first transition condition of executing the variable display of the number of times according to the jackpot type is satisfied, the transition to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is performed (step 014I).
WS001B to 014IWS008B, Step 014IWS100B to 014IWS1
See 05B etc.). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, when the probability variation jackpot B occurs and the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game, the next jackpot is When the fluctuation display is executed 90 times without occurring, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, the probability variation jackpot C occurs, and the probability is high after the jackpot game.
In the case of shifting to the high base state (high probability / first KT state), if the fluctuation display is executed 65 times without the next big hit occurring, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is reached. Transition. In addition, when the probability variation jackpot D occurs and the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game, the variation display is executed 65 times without the next jackpot occurring. , High probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

Further, in this feature unit 014IW, when either the probability variation jackpot E or F occurs and the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game, the next jackpot occurs. Without doing so, either the first transition condition of executing the variable display of the number of times according to the jackpot type and the second transition condition of generating the small hit game state of the number of times according to the jackpot type are satisfied. Then, it shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) (steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS015B, steps 014IWS100B to 0).
See 14IWS107B and the like). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, when the probability variation jackpot E occurs and the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game, the next jackpot is The first transition condition of executing the variable display 90 times without occurring, and
When any one of the transition conditions of the second transition condition of the occurrence of the small hit game state of 30 times is satisfied, the transition to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is performed. Also, the probability change jackpot F
When the game shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after a big hit game, the first transition condition is that the fluctuation display is executed 90 times without the next big hit. And, when any one of the transition conditions of the second transition condition of the occurrence of the small hit game state of 70 times is satisfied, the transition to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is performed.

In addition to the probabilistic jackpots A to F shown in the feature unit 014IW, for example, a probabilistic jackpot G is provided, and when a probabilistic jackpot G occurs, the game shifts to the first KT state after the jackpot game, and the next jackpot is generated. The 1KT state may be maintained. That is, when the probability variation jackpot G occurs, the first transition condition and the second transition condition are not set, and the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) loops until the next jackpot occurs. May be good. Further, in this case, with the probability variation jackpot G and other types of probability variation jackpot G, whether or not various effects (for example, battle effect of battle rush effect and chance battle effect described later, continuous suggestion effect, etc.) are executed and the effect pattern The proportions of may be different.

As shown in FIG. 8-22, when the probability variation jackpot A occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the high probability / low base state (high probability / high probability /) occurs after the jackpot game ends. The second KT state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 138IWS2206B to S2208B, etc.).

In addition, when any of the probability variation jackpots B to D occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability / high probability / high probability / high base state) after the end of the jackpot game.
The high probability / high base state is maintained until the transition to the first KT state) and the first transition condition of executing the variation display of the number of times according to the jackpot type is satisfied (step 014IWS001B ~). 014IWS008B, Step 014IWS100B-014
IWS105B etc.).

In addition, when either the probability variation jackpot E or F occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability / high probability /) occurs after the jackpot game ends.
(1st KT state), the next big hit occurs, or the first transition condition is to execute the variable display of the number of times according to the big hit type, and the second is the occurrence of the small hit game state of the number of times according to the big hit type. The high probability / high base state is maintained until one of the transition conditions is satisfied (steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS015B, step 014IWS10).
0B to 014IWS107B and the like).

In addition, when a normal jackpot A (normal jackpots B and C do not occur when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed) occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state). , After the end of the big hit game, it shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and it is low until the next big hit occurs or the first transition condition of executing the fluctuation display 90 times is satisfied. Probability / high base state is maintained (steps 014IWS001B-014IWS0)
08B, steps 014IWS108B to 014IWS110B, etc.). In this feature unit 014IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a big hit A is usually 35% (see FIG. 8-1 (E)), so that the probability is once low / 3 when it becomes a high base state
A low probability / high base state will loop at a rate of 5%.

Further, in this feature unit 014IW, when any of the normal jackpots A to C occurs and the game shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game, the next jackpot occurs. If the first transition condition of executing the variable display of the number of times according to the jackpot type is satisfied without doing so, the transition to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is made (step 014).
IWS001B to 014IWS008B, Step 014IWS108B to 014IWS
See 110B etc.). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, when a normal jackpot A occurs and the game shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game, the next jackpot is When the fluctuation display is executed 90 times without occurring, the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)). In addition, when a normal jackpot B occurs and the game shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game, the fluctuation display of 65 times is executed without the next jackpot occurring. , Low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)). In addition, when a normal jackpot C occurs and the game shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game, if the fluctuation display is executed 40 times without the next jackpot occurring. , Low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

As shown in FIG. 8-22, when the probability variation jackpot A occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the high probability / low base state (high probability / high probability /) occurs after the jackpot game ends. The second KT state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 138IWS2206B to S2208B, etc.). In addition, this feature part 014
In IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a probability variation jackpot A is 15% when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (FIG. 8-1). See (E))
Once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%.

In addition, when any of the probability variation jackpots B to D occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability / high probability /) occurs after the end of the jackpot game.
The high probability / high base state is maintained until the transition to the first KT state) and the first transition condition of executing the variation display of the number of times according to the jackpot type is satisfied (step 014IWS001B ~). 014IWS008B, Step 014IWS100B-014
IWS105B etc.).

If either the probability variation jackpot E or F occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability / high probability /) occurs after the jackpot game ends.
(1st KT state), the next big hit occurs, or the first transition condition is to execute the variable display of the number of times according to the big hit type, and the second is the occurrence of the small hit game state of the number of times according to the big hit type. The high probability / high base state is maintained until one of the transition conditions is satisfied (steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS015B, step 014IWS10).
0B to 014IWS107B and the like).

In addition, when a normal jackpot A (normal jackpots B and C do not occur when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed) occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), , After the end of the big hit game, it shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and it is low until the next big hit occurs or the first transition condition of executing the fluctuation display 90 times is satisfied. Probability / high base state is maintained (steps 014IWS001B-014IWS0)
07B, see steps 014IWS108B to 014IWS110B, etc.).

In addition, in FIG. 8-22, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but the variation of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. It is possible that the display will be performed. In this case, when the probability variation jackpot A occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Also, the probability change jackpot B
When any of ~ D occurs, it shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the next big hit occurs, or the fluctuation display of 90 times, 65 times, or 40 times is displayed. The high probability / high base state will be maintained until the first transition condition of execution is satisfied. In addition, when either the probability variation jackpot E or F occurs, the high probability / high base state (high probability / 1st KT)
Either the first transition condition of 90 times of variable display execution and the second transition condition of 30 or 70 small hit game states are generated. The high probability / high base state will be maintained until the transition condition of is satisfied. In addition, when a normal jackpot A occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / until the next jackpot occurs or 90 fluctuation displays are executed. A high base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 8-22, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when the probability variation jackpot A occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Also, the probability change jackpot B ~
When any of D occurs, it shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the next big hit occurs, or the fluctuation display is executed 90 times, 65 times, or 40 times. The high probability / high base state will be maintained until the first transition condition is satisfied. In addition, when either the probability variation jackpot E or F occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the next jackpot occurs, or the fluctuation display is executed 90 times. The high probability / high base state is maintained until either the first transition condition of 30 times or 70 times of the small hit game state is satisfied and the second transition condition of occurrence of the small hit game state is satisfied. In addition, when any of the normal jackpots A to C occurs, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state)
The low probability / high base state will be maintained until the next big hit occurs or the first transition condition of executing the fluctuation display 90 times, 65 times, or 40 times is satisfied.

Further, in FIG. 8-22, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when the probability variation jackpot A occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Also, the probability change jackpot B ~
When any of D occurs, it shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the next big hit occurs, or the fluctuation display is executed 90 times, 65 times, or 40 times. The high probability / high base state will be maintained until the first transition condition is satisfied. In addition, when either the probability variation jackpot E or F occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the next jackpot occurs, or the fluctuation display is executed 90 times. The high probability / high base state is maintained until either the first transition condition of 30 times or 70 times of the small hit game state is satisfied and the second transition condition of occurrence of the small hit game state is satisfied. In addition, when any of the normal jackpots A to C occurs, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state)
The low probability / high base state will be maintained until the next big hit occurs or the first transition condition of executing the fluctuation display 90 times, 65 times, or 40 times is satisfied.

Further, in FIG. 8-22, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when the probability variation jackpot A occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Also, the probability change jackpot B ~
When any of D occurs, it shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the next big hit occurs, or the fluctuation display is executed 90 times, 65 times, or 40 times. The high probability / high base state will be maintained until the first transition condition is satisfied. In addition, when either the probability variation jackpot E or F occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the next jackpot occurs, or the fluctuation display is executed 90 times. The high probability / high base state is maintained until either the first transition condition of 30 times or 70 times of the small hit game state is satisfied and the second transition condition of occurrence of the small hit game state is satisfied. In addition, when any of the normal jackpots A to C occurs, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state)
The low probability / high base state will be maintained until the next big hit occurs or the first transition condition of executing the fluctuation display 90 times, 65 times, or 40 times is satisfied.

8-23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external output signal output by the pachinko gaming machine 1. A prize ball signal is assigned to the terminal 01 of the external output terminal plate. The prize ball signal is a signal that is output externally every time a predetermined number of prize balls (10 in this example) are paid out. Further, a jackpot signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 05 of the external output terminal plate. The jackpot signal 1 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during the entire jackpot game (that is, a signal indicating that the jackpot game is in progress). Further, the jackpot signal 2 is connected to the terminal 06 of the external output terminal plate.
Is assigned. The jackpot signal 2 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during all the jackpot games and during the KT state (that is, a signal indicating that the villa is in a row). Further, a special winning opening signal is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope. The special winning opening winning signal is a signal that is output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening. Further, a signal for the planned number of prize balls is assigned to the terminal 09 of the external output terminal plate. The planned number of prize balls signal is a signal that is output externally every time the planned number of prize balls to be paid out reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example).

For each external signal shown in FIG. 8-23, for example, the timing of paying out 10 prize balls, the timing of a big hit, the timing of the occurrence of a prize at a special winning opening, and the planned number of prize balls reached 10. A flag corresponding to the output of an external signal at the timing (for example, step 138IWS)
2021A, S2023A, S2022B, S2023B, S2503B) and timers are set, and based on the fact that those flags and timers are set, the information output process (step S23) is executed to output externally to the hall computer or the like. Will be done.

Next, the output timings of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 among the external output signals will be described. FIG. 8-24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the output timings of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2. In this example, step 138 IWS when the gaming state is the normal state.
Based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in 2022A and S2503B, the information output process (step S23) is executed, and the external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is started. After that, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the timing when the jackpot game is completed. Further, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped at the timing when the KT state is finished. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the KT state, steps 138IWS2022A, S202
Based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in 2B, the information output process (step S23) is executed, and the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is started. In this case, since the KT state is in progress, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output to the outside. After that, information output processing (
In step S23), the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the timing when the jackpot game is completed.

First, the output timings of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / non-KT state) will be described with reference to FIG. 8-24 (1). FIG. 8-24 (1)
As shown in the above, when the game state is the normal state, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot signal 1 is displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. At the same time as the external output is started, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 is started (see step 138IWS2022A). On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 are displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. The external output is not started, and the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is started at the timing when the game ball wants to pass through the passing gate 41, and the external output of the jackpot signal 2 is started (see step 138IWS2503B).

Next, using FIG. 8-24 (2), the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot when the gaming state is the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state). The output timing of the signal 2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-24 (2), when the game state is the KT state, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed.
The external output of the jackpot signal 1 is started at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed (see step 138IWS2022A). Further, when the game state is the KT state, even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is output at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. Started (step 138 IWS)
See 2022B). As shown in FIG. 8-24 (2), when the KT state is in progress,
The jackpot signal 2 is continuously output to the outside.

Next, a normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart showing an example of ordinary symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process processing, the game control microcomputer 100
(Specifically, the CPU 103) means that the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the gate switch 2
When it is detected that 1 is in the ON state (step 138IWS5111), control is performed to transmit a gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 138I).
WS5112). Then, the CPU 103 performs a gate switch passing process (step 138I).
WS5113) is executed.

In the feature unit 014IW, when the process of steps 138IWS5111 to S5113 is executed and the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the gate passage designation command is transmitted. In the feature unit 014IW, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area. Is it in a state of waiting for the passage of the gate after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed and before the jackpot game is started? Regardless of whether or not, the gate passage specification command is sent.

Then, the CPU 103 performs step 138 IWS according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.
One of the processes shown in 5100 to S5104 is executed.

In addition, in this feature unit 014IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step 138IWS5111 regardless of whether or not it is in the gate passage waiting state, the gate switch passage process of step 138IWS5113 is executed. Normally, the variable display of the symbol is executed, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed only when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when it is not in the gate passage waiting state, and the normal symbol is executed even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the gate passing state. It may be configured not to execute the variable display of.

Further, in the feature unit 014IW, the passing gate 41 is normally used as a gate for both the starting region and the operating region, but the special symbol process processing (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed in the timer interrupt processing. Since it is executed before the symbol process process (see step S26), the passage of the game ball of the passing gate 41 as the normal starting area is performed after the detection process of the passage of the game ball of the passing gate 41 as the operating region is performed. The detection process is performed.
Therefore, the process for starting the jackpot game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passing process (step 138IWS5113): The CPU 103 is a gate passing storage counter (a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passing gate 41).
It is confirmed whether or not the count value (the number of memory passing through the gate) has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by +1.
The LED of the normal figure hold indicator 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gates.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 138IWS5100): The CPU 103 is in a state where the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, the value of the normal symbol process flag is step 138I).
When the value indicates WS5100, specifically, it is variable based on the fact that the normal symbol display 20 does not display the variation of the normal symbol and the normal symbol display 20 hits and the symbol is derived and displayed. When the winning ball device 6B is not in the opening / closing operation), the value of the gate passing memory number is confirmed. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is confirmed.
If the number of stored gates is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation processing (step 138IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step 138IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step 138IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 138IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a missed symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal symbol normal processing (step 138IWS5100).
Is updated to a value indicating (specifically, "0"). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the time before opening the normal electric accessory is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is processed before opening the normal electric accessory (step 138).
Update to a value (specifically, "3") indicating IWS5103).

Pre-processing for opening the normal electric accessory (step 138IWS5103): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol process timer to the normal electric accessory operation time and timers. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory operation process (step 138IWS5104).

Normal electric accessory operation process (step 138IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step 138IWS5100).

FIG. 8-26 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step 138 IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step 138IWS5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (step 138IWS5)
121 Y), the process ends as it is. If the number of gate passage memories is not 0 (step 1)
38IWS5121 N), the CPU 103 reads out a random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage storage = 1 (step 138IWS5122).
). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passing memory counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 138IWS5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random values for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each gate passing memory number are always extracted is that the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is designed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol, performs a lottery process based on a random number (random number value for determining whether to hit a normal symbol), and determines whether or not to hit a normal symbol. (Step 138 IWS5127). This feature unit 01
In 4IW, in step 138IWS5127, the CPU 103 is uniformly 100 regardless of whether it is in the probabilistic state, the KT state, or the high base state.
It is decided that the probability of hitting a normal symbol is%.

In step 138IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is within the hit range (when it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets the hit symbol as a display result (step 138IWS5128), and proceeds to step 138IWS5130. Further, in step 138IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range (when it is out of the range), the CPU 103 sets the outlier symbol as the display result (step 138IWS5129), and proceeds to step 138IWS5130. In addition, in this feature unit 014IW, since the normal drawing game is configured to be 100% per game regardless of the game state, the process of step 138IWS5127 is omitted and step 1
The process of 38IWS5128 may be executed.

In step 138 IWS5130, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer if the high base flag is set (.
Step 138 IWS5130 Y, S5131). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N, in step 138IWS5130).
S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 138IWS5101) (step 138IWS5133).

FIG. 8-27 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process (step 138 IWS 5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step 138IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 138IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 138IWS3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 138IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (in step 138IWS5127). (Whether or not it was determined) is confirmed (step 138IWS3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is confirmed by, for example, setting the normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 138IWS5127, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a missed symbol (N in step 138 IWS 3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 138 IWS 5100) (step 138 IWS 5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step 138IWS3708).

In step 138IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step 138IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag or the extension flag is set (step 138IWS3704), and the high base flag. When is set, that is, in the first KT state, or when the extension flag is set, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 138IWS3706). ). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 138 IW).
S3705). In addition, in this feature unit 014IW, the normal figure game is 100 regardless of the game state.
Since it is configured to be per%, the process of step 138 IWS 3703 may be omitted and the process of step 138 IWS 3704 may be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 138IWS5103) (step 1).
38IWS3707)

FIG. 8-28 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step 138 IWS 5103). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step 138IWS3801). And the CPU 103
It is confirmed whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 138IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 138IWS3802), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step 138IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag or the extension flag is set (Y). Step 138 IWS380
3) When the high base flag is set, that is, when the first KT state is set, or when the extension flag is set, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time. Set (step 138IWS3805). When the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 138IWS3804).

In this way, in this feature unit 014IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to win a start prize in the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the control method for facilitating the start winning of the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in the feature unit 014IW. For example, the first
In the KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened. While 1 time is set as the number of times, 2 times may be set as the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened in the first KT state). That way
In the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened,
It is possible to make it easier to win a start prize in the second start prize opening.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, the control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B shown above and the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state. It may be executed in combination with the control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state (step 138).
IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step 138IWS5104) (step 13).
8IWS3807).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described.

The feature unit 014IW is configured to be controlled to one of a plurality of effect modes according to the game state. Specifically, when controlled to the non-KT state (that is, the normal state (low probability / low base state)), the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode. Further, when controlled in the second KT state (that is, high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state)), the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode.

In addition, the first KT state (that is, low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) or high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state)) after the big hit game by the first special figure game.
), The effect mode is controlled to the battle challenge mode in which the battle challenge effect is executed.

In addition, the first KT state (that is, low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) or high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state)) after the big hit game by the second special figure game.
), The effect mode is controlled to the chance battle mode in which the chance battle effect is executed.

That is, whether it is controlled in the low probability state or the high probability state, and the first KT.
Regardless of whether it is controlled in state A, first KT state B, or first KT state C.
When it is controlled to the 1st KT state after the big hit game by the 1st special figure game, it is controlled to the battle challenge mode, and when it is controlled to the 1st KT state after the big hit game by the 2nd special figure game, it is controlled to the chance battle mode. ..

As described above, when the feature unit 014IW is controlled to the first KT state after the big hit game by the first special figure game or the second special figure game, it is controlled to either the low probability state or the high probability state. Further, the first KT state A, the first KT state B, and the first KT state C.
Regardless of which one is controlled, the battle challenge effect or the chance battle effect of the common mode is configured to be executed. Therefore, when the battle challenge effect or the chance battle effect is executed, which of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is controlled, and which of the first KT state A, the first KT state B, and the first KT state C is set. Since it is difficult for the player to guess whether it is controlled or not, it is possible to improve the game interest.

FIG. 8-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the battle challenge effect and the chance battle effect. First, the battle challenge production will be explained.

The battle challenge production is a production in which a moving image with a story is displayed, and the story is configured to shift in the order of the production explanation section, the first battle section, the second battle section, and the third battle section. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-29 (1), the 1st to 15th fluctuations after the big hit game by the 1st special figure game correspond to the production explanation section, and the 16th to 40th fluctuations are the first. It corresponds to the 1st battle part, and the 41st to 65th fluctuations correspond to the 2nd battle part, 6
The 6th to 90th fluctuations correspond to the 3rd battle section.

In the production explanation section from the 1st fluctuation to the 15th fluctuation, the contents of the battle challenge production and the story are explained. Further, in the first battle section from the 16th variation to the 40th variation, the first battle effect in which the battle between the ally character and the enemy character A is performed is performed, and the victory or defeat is notified at the 40th variation. Further, in the second battle section from the 41st variation to the 65th variation, a second battle production in which a battle between the ally character and the enemy character B is performed is performed, and the victory or defeat is notified at the 65th variation. Further, in the third battle section from the 66th variation to the 90th variation, a third battle effect in which a battle between the ally character and the enemy character C is performed is performed, and the victory or defeat is notified at the 90th variation. In this way, after the 1st to 15th fluctuations are the production explanation unit, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed every 25 fluctuations, and the victory or defeat is notified of each.

As shown in FIG. 8-29 (1), in the battle challenge production, the story shifts to the first battle unit when the production explanation unit ends. Then, in the first battle production in the first battle section, when the ally character defeats the enemy character A, the battle challenge production continues.
The story shifts to the second battle section. On the other hand, when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character A, a notification is given to the effect that the normal state is entered, and the battle challenge production ends at that point.

In addition, in the second battle production in the second battle section, if the ally character wins the enemy character B, the battle challenge production continues, the story shifts to the third battle section, and the ally character is defeated by the enemy character B. A notification was made to the effect that it will shift to the normal state,
At that point, the battle challenge production ends. Then, in the third battle production in the third battle section, when the ally character wins the enemy character C, a notification is made that the game shifts to the small hit RUSH, the battle challenge production ends, and the ally character becomes the enemy character C. If you are defeated, you will be notified that you will move to the normal state, and the battle challenge production will end.

In the first battle production and the second battle production of the battle challenge production, the battle challenge production is continued at the time of victory and the high base state is continued, and the battle challenge production is finished at the time of defeat and the high base state is finished and the normal state. Since it is designed to shift to, it will be notified whether or not the battle challenge production will be continued and whether or not the high base state will be continued by the notification of victory or defeat. In addition, in the third battle production of the battle challenge production, it shifts to the small hit RUSH at the time of victory and shifts to the normal state at the time of defeat. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 8-29 (1), in the feature unit 014IW, the production explanation unit, regardless of whether the probability variation jackpot (excluding the probability variation jackpot A) or the normal jackpot by the first special figure game occurs. A battle challenge production of a common mode in which the story shifts in the order of the first battle part, the second battle part, and the third battle part is executed. In addition, the battle challenge production is provided with a plurality of production patterns with different story developments.

As shown in FIG. 8-29 (1), in the first production pattern of the battle challenge production, the first battle production wins at the 40th variation, the second battle production wins at the 65th variation, and the 90th variation. This is a production pattern in which a notification is made that the final victory in the third battle production is completed, the battle challenge production is completed, and the game shifts to the small hit RUSH. In this feature part 014IW, among the victory in the battle production in the battle challenge production and the chance battle production, the small hit RUS after the victory
The victory that shifts to H is also called the final victory.

The second production pattern of the battle challenge production wins in the first battle production at the 40th fluctuation,
This is a production pattern in which the player wins in the second battle production at the 65th fluctuation, but is defeated in the third battle production at the 90th fluctuation, ends the battle challenge production, and is notified that the normal state is entered.

In the third production pattern of the battle challenge production, the first battle production wins at the 40th fluctuation, but the battle challenge production ends after losing the second battle production at the 65th fluctuation, and a notification that the normal state is entered. It is a production pattern that is made.

The fourth production pattern of the battle challenge production is a production pattern in which a notification is given that the battle challenge production ends after being defeated in the first battle production at the 40th fluctuation, and the normal state is entered.

In the feature unit 014IW, the second to fourth production patterns of the battle challenge production are usually used when a big hit occurs (see FIG. 8-35 (C)). Therefore, when the battle is defeated and the battle challenge production ends, it is confirmed that the probability is low.

In this feature unit 014IW, in the battle challenge production, if the battle is won, the battle challenge production continues (that is, the high base state continues), while if the battle is defeated, the battle challenge production ends (that is, the high base state ends). ), It is configured to shift to small hit RUSH when winning 3 battles, except for the 1st or 2nd
It is configured so that there are cases where the player wins the second battle (that is, the final victory) and shifts to the small hit RUSH (that is, the degree of advantage is higher than the high base state continues).

The first special production pattern of the battle challenge production is that the first battle production wins at the 40th fluctuation, the final victory in the second battle production at the 65th fluctuation, the battle challenge production ends, and the game shifts to the small hit RUSH. It is a production pattern in which the notification is made.

The second special production pattern of the battle challenge production is a production pattern in which a notification is made that the battle challenge production ends with the final victory in the first battle production at the 40th fluctuation, and the game shifts to the small hit RUSH.

Next, the chance battle production will be described. The chance battle effect is an effect in which a moving image with a story is displayed, and the story is configured to shift in the order of the effect explanation part, the first battle part, the second battle part, and the third battle part. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-29 (2), the 1st to 15th fluctuations after the big hit game by the 2nd special figure game correspond to the production explanation section, and the 16th to 40th fluctuations are the first. It corresponds to the 1st battle part, the 41st to 65th fluctuations correspond to the 2nd battle part, and the 66th to 90th fluctuations correspond to the 3rd battle part.

In the production explanation section from the 1st fluctuation to the 15th fluctuation, the contents of the chance battle production and the story are explained. Further, in the first battle section from the 16th variation to the 40th variation, the first battle effect in which the battle between the ally character and the enemy character A is performed is performed, and the victory or defeat is notified at the 40th variation. Further, in the second battle section from the 41st variation to the 65th variation, a second battle production in which a battle between the ally character and the enemy character B is performed is performed, and the victory or defeat is notified at the 65th variation. Further, in the third battle section from the 66th variation to the 90th variation, a third battle effect in which a battle between the ally character and the enemy character C is performed is performed, and the victory or defeat is notified at the 90th variation. In this way, after the 1st to 15th fluctuations are the production explanation unit, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed every 25 fluctuations, and the victory or defeat is notified of each.

As shown in FIG. 8-29 (2), in the chance battle production, the story shifts to the first battle unit when the production explanation section ends. Then, in the first battle production in the first battle section, when the ally character defeats the enemy character A, a game ball is given and the story shifts to the second battle section. On the other hand, if the ally character is defeated by the enemy character A, the story shifts to the second battle section without being given a game ball.

In addition, in the second battle production in the second battle section, when the ally character defeats the enemy character B, a game ball is given, the story shifts to the third battle section, and the ally character is defeated by the enemy character B. The story shifts to the 3rd battle section without the game ball being given. Further, in the third battle production in the third battle section, if the ally character defeats the enemy character C, a game ball is given, and if the ally character loses to the enemy character C, the game ball is not given.

Then, when the third battle effect in the third battle unit is completed, the rush determination effect for notifying whether or not to shift to the small hit RUSH is executed. In the rush determination effect, it is notified whether or not to shift to the small hit RUSH depending on the mode in which the game balls given so far are used. Further, in the rush judgment effect, the more the game balls given so far, the higher the ratio of shifting to the small hit RUSH is configured (see FIG. 8-35 (E)).

As shown in FIG. 8-29 (2), in this feature unit 014IW, either a probabilistic jackpot (excluding the probabilistic jackpot A) or a normal jackpot (excluding the probabilistic jackpots B and C) by the second special figure game occurs. Even if this is done, a chance battle production in a common mode in which the story shifts in the order of the production explanation unit, the first battle unit, the second battle unit, and the third battle unit is executed. In addition, the chance battle production is provided with a plurality of production patterns having different story developments.

As shown in FIG. 8-29 (2), in the first effect pattern of the chance battle effect, the winner of the first battle effect and the presence or absence of the game ball are notified at the 40th variation, and the second battle effect is given at the 65th variation. The winning / losing and the presence / absence of the game ball are notified, and the winning / losing of the third battle production and the presence / absence of the game ball are notified at the 90th fluctuation, and the mode using the game balls given so far after the end of the third battle production. This is an effect pattern in which the rush determination effect of is performed, and as a result of the rush determination effect, a notification is made to shift to the small hit RUSH.

In the second production pattern of the chance battle effect, the winner of the first battle effect and the presence or absence of the game ball are notified at the 40th variation, and the victory or defeat of the second battle effect and the presence or absence of the game ball are notified at the 65th variation. At the 90th change, the winner of the 3rd battle production and the presence or absence of a game ball are notified, and
After the end of the third battle effect, the rush determination effect of the mode using the game balls given so far is performed, and as a result of the rush determination effect, a notification that the normal state is entered is made.

In the feature unit 014IW, the second effect pattern of the chance battle effect is usually used when the jackpot A occurs (see FIG. 8-35 (D)). Therefore, when the notification of the transition to the normal state is given as the rush determination effect, it is confirmed that the state is in the low probability state.

In this feature unit 014IW, in the chance battle production, in principle, regardless of the victory or defeat of the battle production, it shifts to the next story and the battle production is executed three times (that is, the high base state is continued until the 90th fluctuation). However, exceptionally, when the player shifts to the small hit RUSH after winning the first or second battle (that is, the final victory) (that is, the high base state is continued until the 90th fluctuation). It is configured so that there are cases (when the degree of advantage is higher than).

In the first special production pattern of the chance battle production, the victory or defeat of the first battle production and the presence or absence of the game ball are notified at the 40th fluctuation, and the final victory in the second battle production at the 65th fluctuation ends the chance battle production. , It is an effect pattern in which a notification to the effect of shifting to the small hit RUSH is made.

The second special effect pattern of the chance battle effect is an effect pattern in which the player is notified that the chance battle effect is completed by the final victory in the first battle effect at the 40th fluctuation, and the game shifts to the small hit RUSH.

Comparing the battle challenge production and the chance battle production, in the battle challenge production, the battle challenge production ends when the battle is defeated (that is, the high base state ends), but in the challenge battle production, even if the battle is defeated, the challenge ends. The difference is that the battle effect is continued (that is, the high base state is continued). With such a configuration, the playability and the degree of advantage between the battle challenge production and the chance battle production can be different.

Further, in the chance battle production, a game ball is given when the battle is won, and the more the game balls given, the higher the ratio of shifting to the small hit RUSH is configured. Therefore, even if the battle is defeated, the challenge battle effect is continued (that is, the high base state is continued), but the result of the battle can be noticed.

In the feature unit 014IW, the production pattern of the battle challenge effect is configured to be determined according to the type of jackpot that has occurred (step 014IWS203 described later).
Therefore, when controlled to either of the first KT states A and B, the final victory is achieved in the battle production of the battle challenge production at the 40th, 65th, or 90th variation in which the first transition condition is satisfied, and the first transition condition is set. At the 40th or 65th fluctuation that does not hold, you will win in the battle production of the battle challenge production. Further, when controlled to the first KT state C, the battle effect of the battle challenge effect is defeated at the 40th, 65th, or 90th variation in which the first transition condition is satisfied.

Further, in this feature unit 014IW, the production pattern of the chance battle effect is also configured to be determined according to the type of jackpot that has occurred (step 014IWS203 described later).
). Therefore, when controlled to either of the first KT states A and B, the final victory is achieved in the battle production of the battle challenge production at the 40th or 65th variation in which the first transition condition is satisfied, and the first transition condition is not satisfied. At the 40th or 65th fluctuation, the player wins or loses in the battle production of the battle challenge production, and at the 90th fluctuation when the first transition condition is satisfied, the notification that the small hit RUSH will be performed in the rush judgment production will be notified. .. Further, when the first KT state C is controlled, the notification that the state shifts to the normal state is given in the rush determination effect at the 90th variation in which the first transition condition is satisfied.

In this way, each battle production of battle challenge production and chance battle production is the first.
This is a production that suggests the establishment of transition conditions. In addition, each battle production of the battle challenge production and the chance battle production is in a normal state after the production is completed, depending on the type of the first transition condition (that is, the jackpot type) that has been set. When moving to and the second
It is configured to notify (including the case of shifting to the KT state). With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether the battle challenge production and the chance battle production continue or end, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In this feature unit 014IW, during the period controlled by the battle challenge mode or the chance battle mode, the establishment of the second transition condition is established in parallel with the battle challenge production or the chance battle production that suggests the establishment of the first transition condition. It is configured to perform the suggested small hit meter effect. Further, the small hit meter production is a production mode different from the battle challenge production and the chance battle production (see FIGS. 8-41 and the like). With such a configuration
It is possible to pay attention to both the establishment of the first transition condition and the establishment of the second transition condition, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the processing related to the production in the feature unit 014IW will be described.

FIG. 8-30 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is received (step 138IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). In step 138IWS811, it may be confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 138I).
WS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the first special symbol. (Step 138IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 07. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 12
0 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 138IWS815).

If the 1st KT state flag or the 2nd KT state flag is not set (ie,
(If it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol (step 138IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 32. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (that is,
(If the variable display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 138 IWS816).

By executing the process of step 138IWS812 to S815, the feature unit 0
In 14IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and in the KT state, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In response to the variation display, the image display device 5 executes the variation display of the decorative symbol. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, or even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is in the non-KT state. , The variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

FIG. 8-31 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 138IWS920). In this feature unit 014IW, the display result 1
When the specified command is received (when it is determined to be out of order), the combination of the out-of-reach symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are completely inconsistent or the reach out-of-reach symbols in which only the left and right decorative symbols match is determined. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when the probability variation jackpot A is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are arranged in odd numbers is determined. In addition, when the display result 3 to 10 designation command is received (when it is determined to be one of the probabilistic jackpots B to F and the normal jackpots A to C), the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are even-numbered symbols. Determine the combination of. When the display result 11 to 13 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the decorative symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is controlled in the first KT state (step 138IWS921). Whether or not the control is performed in the KT state can be determined by checking the effect mode. Specifically, when it is controlled to any of the production modes of the battle challenge mode and the chance battle mode, it can be determined that it is in the first KT state. If it is not controlled to the first KT state, the effect control CPU 12
0 selects the process table according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command (step 138IWS933), and proceeds to step 138IWS934.

When controlled in the first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the 40th, 65th, or 90th variation after being controlled in the first KT state (step 138I).
WS922). It should be noted that whether or not it is the 40th, 65th, or 90th fluctuation after being controlled to the first KT state is confirmed by checking the value of the production high base number counter for managing the remaining number of times in the high base state on the production control side. It can be judged by. Specifically, the value of the high-base count counter for production is set to any of "90", "65", and "40" when shifting to the first KT state, and is subtracted by 1 at the end of the fluctuation. Therefore, if the value is any one of "0", "25", and "50", it can be determined that it is the 40th, 65th, or 90th variation after the transition to the first KT state.

When it is not the 40th, 65th or 90th fluctuation after being controlled to the 1st KT state (step 1)
In N) of 38IWS922, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command and the effect pattern of the determined effect mode (step 138IWS923), and steps 138IWS934.
Move to. In this feature unit 014IW, step 138IWS935 and the variable display in-effect processing (step S172), which will be described later, are executed according to the process table selected in step 138IWS923, so that a battle challenge effect, a chance battle effect, etc. are performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is executed.

When it is the 40th, 65th or 90th variation after being controlled to the 1st KT state (step 13).
In 8IWS922 Y), the effect control CPU 120 continues to be in a high base state (Y).
That is, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuation suggestion effect suggesting that the battle challenge effect continues (step S138IWS924). In step S138IWS924, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using a continuation suggestion effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute the continuous suggestion effect, and determines whether or not to execute the continuous suggestion effect.

FIG. 8-32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the continuation suggestion effect determination table. In this example, as shown in the continuation suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 8-32, in the case of a variable number of times to win the battle, it is decided to execute the continuation suggestion effect with a probability of 70%, and the battle is defeated. In the case of fluctuating times, it is decided to execute the continuous suggestion effect with a probability of 30%. It should be noted that whether or not it is a variable number of times to win the battle can be determined by checking the effect pattern of the battle challenge effect determined in step 014IWS203, which will be described later, and the value of the high base number counter for effect. For example, if the effect pattern is any of the second to fourth effect patterns and the value of the effect high base number counter is "0", it can be determined that it is the timing to lose the battle.

As shown in FIG. 8-32, when the battle is won and the battle challenge effect continues (that is, when the high base state continues), the rate at which the continuation suggestion effect is executed increases, so that the continuation suggestion effect is produced. Can be expected to be executed. In addition, since the continuation suggestion effect is executed before notifying whether or not the battle challenge effect continues (that is, whether or not the high base state continues), the degree of attention to the notification can be increased.

In addition, in this feature unit 014IW, when the chance battle effect is executed by shifting to the first KT state after the big hit game by the second special figure game, a special effect pattern of shifting to the small hit RUSH before 90 fluctuations is performed. Except for this, in principle, the production pattern is such that the high base state is continued until the 90th fluctuation. Therefore, when the chance battle effect is executed, the effect content of the continuation suggestion effect is to win the battle of the 40th, 65th, or 90th variation (that is, a game ball is given and the player enters the small hit RUSH. It may suggest that it is more likely). Further, in the case of such a configuration, it can be specified by the game ball giving pattern determined in step 014IWS203, which will be described later, when the number of times the game ball is given is fluctuating.
(See FIG. 8-35 (E))), the ratio of the effect being executed may be increased.

Further, the feature unit 014IW is configured to execute the continuation suggestion effect at the 40th, 65th, or 90th variation in which it is notified whether or not the high base state is continued by the battle effect. The continuation suggestion effect may be executed at the variation line before the change, for example, the 39th, 64th, or 89th variation, in which it is notified whether or not the high base state is continued by the battle effect. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the attention of the battle production in advance.

If it is not decided to execute the continuation suggestion effect (N in step 138IW925)
, If it is decided to move to step 138IWS923 and execute the continuation suggestion effect (
Step 138 IW925 Y), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, the effect pattern of the determined effect mode, and the continuous suggestion effect determined to be executed (step). 138IWS926
), Step 138 IWS934. In this feature unit 014IW, step 138
Step 138 IWS935 described below according to the process table selected in IWS926
By executing the variable display effect processing (step S172), a battle challenge effect, a chance battle effect, a continuation suggestion effect, and the like are executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 is set in steps 138IWS923, S926, S93.
Set the process timer setting value of process data 1 in the process table selected in step 3 to the process timer and start the process timer (step 138IWS934).
.. Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the content of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1).
, Lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), and control of the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) is executed (step 138IWS935). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14.
Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer (step 138IWS936). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 138 IWS937).

FIG. 8-33 is a flowchart showing the effect mode setting process. The effect mode setting process is a process performed as a part of the process of waiting for the special figure in FIG. 7 (S173).

In the effect mode setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 014IWS200), and if not, proceeds to step 014IWS209. When the jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) is received, that is, when a jackpot occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode to be controlled after the jackpot game. The effect mode determination process to be determined is executed (step 014IWS201).

8-35 (A) and 8-35 (B) are explanatory views showing a specific example of an effect mode determination table for determining an effect mode. The first effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 8-35 (A) is used when a big hit occurs in the first special figure game. That is, it is used when the first jackpot start designation command is received. Further, the second effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 8-35 (A) is used when a big hit occurs in the second special figure game. That is, it is used when the second big hit start designation command is received. Step 014 IWS
In 201, one of the first effect mode determination table and the second effect mode determination table is used to determine the effect mode to be controlled after the big hit game.

As shown in FIGS. 8-35 (A) and (B), when the probability variation big hit A occurs, the small hit R
It is decided to control to USH mode. In addition, the probability change jackpot B ~ by the first special figure game
When either F or normal jackpots A to C occurs, it is decided to control to the battle challenge mode. Further, when any of the probabilistic jackpots B to F and the normal jackpots A to C occurs in the second special figure game, it is determined to control the chance battle mode. It should be noted that which jackpot type the generated jackpot is can be determined by confirming which display result specification command is received.

Next, when the probability variation jackpot A has occurred (Y in step S014IWS202), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is, and when the probability variation jackpot A has not occurred (N in step S014IWS202), The effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern of the effect mode (specifically, the effect pattern of the battle challenge effect or the chance battle effect) is executed (step S014IWS203).

8-35 (C) and 8-35 (D) are explanatory views showing a specific example of an effect pattern determination table for determining an effect pattern. The first effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-35 (C) is used when the effect mode is determined to be the battle challenge mode. Figure 8-3
The second effect pattern determination table shown in 5 (D) is used when the effect mode is determined to be the chance battle mode. In step 014IWS203, the effect pattern is determined using either the first effect pattern determination table or the second effect mode determination table.

When determining the effect pattern of the battle challenge effect, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (C), when the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot B, E, F, the first effect pattern is determined. In this first production pattern, the first battle is won on the 40th fluctuation, the second battle is won on the 65th fluctuation, and the final victory is achieved on the third battle on the 90th fluctuation. This is an effect pattern for notifying the transition to RUSH (see the first effect pattern in FIG. 8-29 (1)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (C), in the case of the probability variation jackpot C, the first special effect pattern is determined. This 1st special production pattern wins in the 1st battle on the 40th fluctuation,
In the 65th fluctuation, the final victory in the second battle ended the battle challenge production, and the small hit RUSH
This is an effect pattern for notifying the transition to (see the first special effect pattern in FIG. 8-29 (1)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (C), in the case of the probability variation jackpot D, the second special effect pattern is determined. This second special production pattern is a production pattern that notifies the transition to the small hit RUSH after the final victory in the first battle at the 40th fluctuation and the end of the battle challenge production (No. 1 in FIG. 8-29 (1)). 2 See special production pattern).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (C), in the case of a normal jackpot A, the second effect pattern is determined. In this second production pattern, the first battle is won in the 40th fluctuation and the second battle is won in the 65th fluctuation, but the battle challenge production is completed in the third battle in the 90th fluctuation, and the normal state. This is an effect pattern for notifying the transition to (see the second effect pattern in FIG. 8-29 (1)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (C), in the case of a normal jackpot B, the third effect pattern is determined. This third production pattern wins the first battle on the 40th fluctuation, but 65
This is an effect pattern for notifying the transition to the normal state after losing in the second battle at the fluctuation point and ending the battle challenge effect (see the third effect pattern in FIG. 8-29 (1)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (C), in the case of a normal jackpot C, the fourth effect pattern is determined. This fourth production pattern is a production pattern that notifies the transition to the normal state after losing in the first battle at the 40th fluctuation and ending the battle challenge production (Fig. 8-29 (Fig. 8-29 (Fig. 8-29 (Fig. 8-29)
Refer to the 4th production pattern in 1)).

When determining the effect pattern of the chance battle effect, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (D), when the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot B, E, F, the first effect pattern is determined. In this first production pattern, the first battle is performed on the 40th fluctuation, the second battle is performed on the 65th fluctuation, and the third battle is performed on the 90th fluctuation. This is an effect pattern to be notified (see the first effect pattern in FIG. 8-29 (2)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (D), in the case of the probability variation jackpot C, the first special effect pattern is determined. This first special effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the first battle is performed on the 40th variation and the second battle is performed on the 65th variation, and after the second battle, the transition to the small hit RUSH is notified (FIG. 8-29 (Fig. 8-29 (Fig. 8-29 (Fig. 8-29) See 2) 1st special effect pattern).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (C), in the case of the probability variation jackpot D, the second special effect pattern is determined. This second special effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the first battle is performed at the 40th variation, and after the first battle, the transition to the small hit RUSH is notified (FIG. 8-29 (2).
) Second special production pattern).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (C), in the case of a normal jackpot A, the second effect pattern is determined. This second production pattern is the first battle on the 40th fluctuation and the second on the 65th fluctuation.
This is an effect pattern in which the third battle is performed at the 90th variation of the battle, the rush determination is performed after the third battle, and the transition to the normal state is notified (see the second effect pattern in FIG. 8-29 (2)).

In step 014IWS203, when the effect mode is determined to be the chance battle mode, the effect pattern related to the game ball grant pattern is further determined by using the third effect pattern determination table.

FIG. 8-35 (E) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the third effect pattern determination table. In this example, the first to eighth grant patterns are provided. For example, the first grant pattern is 40.
It is a pattern in which a game ball is given at any of the variable eyes, the 65th variable, and the 90th variable. That is, it is a pattern that wins any of the first to third battles in the chance battle production. Further, for example, the eighth grant pattern is the 40th variation, the 65th variation, and the 90th variation.
It is a pattern in which no game ball is given in any of the fluctuations. That is, it is a pattern of losing to any of the first to third battles in the chance battle production.

In the example shown in the third effect pattern determination table of FIG. 8-35 (E), when the jackpot type of the generated jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the total number of game balls given is larger than that in the case of a normal jackpot. It is configured so that the ratio determined for a large number of grant patterns is high. That is, the larger the total number of game balls given, the higher the possibility that the game is controlled to a high probability state, and the higher the possibility of shifting to the small hit RUSH. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the fact that the battle is won in the chance battle production and the game ball is given, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In this feature unit 014IW, step S014IWS201 and step S014IW
The information determined in S203 is stored, and after the big hit game, control is performed in one of the production modes based on the information determined and stored in step S014IWS201. Further, when controlling to either the battle challenge mode or the chance battle mode, step S01
4 Based on the information determined and stored in IWS203, a battle challenge production or a chance battle production is executed according to one of the production patterns. Information on the battle challenge effect and the effect pattern of the chance battle effect is discarded when the battle challenge mode and the chance battle mode are completed due to the occurrence of a big hit or the transition to the second KT state or the non-KT state.

The feature unit 014IW is controlled to the effect mode determined in step S014IWS201 after the big hit game, but is not limited to such a configuration, for example, an aspect corresponding to the effect mode determined in step S014IWS201 during the big hit game. May be performed. Specifically, even if the effect of the mode suggesting the transition to the battle challenge mode or the chance battle mode or the effect of the mode suggesting the transition to the small hit RUSH is executed during the big hit game. Good.

When the production pattern of the battle challenge production or the chance battle production is determined, the production control CPU 120 sets a value of 90, 65, or 40 in the production high base number counter according to the jackpot type (step 014IWS204). Specifically, the probability variation jackpot B,
In the case of either E, F or normal jackpot A, the high base count counter for production is set to "90".
In the case of probability variation jackpot C and normal jackpot B, set "65" in the production high base count counter, and in the case of probability variation jackpot D and normal jackpot C, set the production high base count counter. Set "40".

Further, the effect control CPU 120 produces an effect of shifting from the first KT state to the second KT state when the set transition condition is satisfied when the type of the generated jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (Y in step 014IWS205). 2nd KT for production for management on the control side
Set the migration flag (step 014IWS206).

Further, when the type of the generated jackpot is either probabilistic jackpot E or F (Y in step 014IWS207), the effect control CPU 120 has a small hit required to satisfy the second transition condition according to the jackpot type. A value of 30 or 70 is set in the effect small hit count counter for managing the number of occurrences of the game state on the effect control side (step 014IWS208).
). Specifically, in the case of the probability variation big hit E, "30" is set in the effect small hit count counter, and in the case of the probability variation jackpot F, "70" is set in the effect small hit counter. Then, the process ends.

When the big hit start designation command is not received (N in step 014IWS200), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command is received (step 014IWS209), and when it is not received. To step 014 IWS220
Move to.

When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the effect small hit count counter is "0" (step 014IWS210).
, "0", that is, after the end of the jackpot game based on either the probability variation jackpot E or F, if the high probability / first KT state (first KT state B) is not controlled, the process proceeds to step 014IW211. Transition. High probability / 1st K after the value of the small hit count counter for production is not "0", that is, after the big hit game based on either the probability variation big hit E or F is completed.
When controlled to the T state (first KT state B), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts "1" from the value of the effect small hit count counter (step 014IWS011A) to determine whether or not the value has reached "0". Is determined (step 014IWS211). If the value of the small hit count counter for production does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 014IWS211. When the value of the effect small hit count counter becomes "0", that is, when the set second transition condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the small hit RUSH mode. It is decided (step 014IWS213).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit transition condition establishment flag indicating that the set second transition condition is satisfied (step 014IWS214), and clears the value of the effect high base number counter (step). 014IWS215), 2nd K for production
Reset the T transition flag (step 014IWS216). Then, the process ends.

The feature unit 014IW is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode determined in step S014IWS213 after the small hit game, but is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, shifts to the small hit RUSH mode during the small hit game. The effect of the mode suggesting the above may be executed.

In step S014IWS220, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the reception waiting time of the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Then, when the reception waiting time has elapsed (Y in step S014IWS220), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the value of the effect high base number counter is set. It is determined whether or not it is "0" (step 138IWS221).

When the value of the high base count counter for production is "0", the processing is terminated, and when the value of the high base count counter for production is not "0", that is, low probability / first KT state or high probability / first. When controlled to the 1KT state and the first transition condition is set, the effect control CPU
In 120, the value of the high-base count counter for production is subtracted by "1" (step 138IWS22).
2), it is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 138IWS223). If the value of the high base count counter for production does not become "0", the process ends, and if the value of the high base count counter for production becomes "0", that is, the set first transition condition is set. If it is established, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect second KT transition flag is set (step 138 IWS 224).

When the second KT transition flag for production is set (Y in step 138IWS224)
), That is, when the probability is controlled to the high probability / the first KT state and the state shifts from the first KT state to the second KT state based on the satisfaction of the first transition condition, the effect control CPU 120
Determines to control the production mode to the small hit RUSH mode (step 014IW)
S225). Further, the effect control CPU 120 clears the value of the effect high base number counter (step 014IWS226) and resets the effect second KT transition flag (step 014IWS227). Then, the process ends.

When the second KT transition flag for production is not set (N in step 138IWS224), that is, it is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, and the first KT state is changed to the non-KT based on the fact that the first transition condition is satisfied. When shifting to the state, the effect control CPU 120
Determines to control the effect mode to the normal mode (step 014IWS228).
..

The feature unit 014IW is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode determined in step S014IWS225 and the normal mode determined in step S014IWS228 with the start of the next fluctuation, but is not limited to such a configuration, for example, the next time. Small hit RUS before the start of fluctuation
It may be controlled to H mode or normal mode.

In the effect mode setting process shown in FIGS. 8-33 and 8-34, step 014IWS2
By the processing of 00 to S208, after the big hit game, it is controlled to one of the production modes of the battle challenge mode, the chance battle mode, and the small hit RUSH mode.

Further, if the second transition condition is satisfied while being controlled to the first KT state B by the processing of steps 014IWS209 to S216, the battle challenge mode or chance battle mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode.

Further, if the first transition condition is satisfied while being controlled to either of the first KT states A and B by the processing of steps 014IWS220 to S227, the battle challenge mode or chance battle mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. It will be.

Further, if the first transition condition is satisfied while being controlled to the first KT state C by the processing of steps 014IWS220 to S224 and S228, the battle challenge mode or the chance battle mode is controlled to the normal mode.

FIG. 8-36 is a flowchart showing the meter increase effect processing. The meter increase effect process is a process performed as a part of the small hit medium effect process (S174) in FIG. 7. Since the meter increase effect process is a process related to the meter increase effect that increases the scale of the meter displayed in the small hit meter effect, it is controlled to the normal mode or the small hit RUSH mode in which the small hit meter effect is not executed. When it is, it may not be executed.

In the meter increase effect process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the meter increase effect flag indicating that the meter increase effect is being executed is set (step 01).
4IWS300), if set, the process proceeds to step 014IWS310.

When the meter increase effect flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the effect small hit count counter is “0” (step 014IWS3).
01). Then, when the value of the small hit count counter for effect is not "0", that is, when the set second transition condition is not yet satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the meter increase effect. (Step 014IWS303). In addition, CP for production control
The U120 sets the meter increase effect flag (step 014IWS304), and shifts to step 014IWS310.

The value of the small hit count counter for production is "0" (Y in step 014IWS301), and
And when the small hit transition condition establishment flag is set (Y in step 014IWS305), that is, when the set second transition condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 12
0 is a meter increase effect and a transition notification effect for notifying the transition to the small hit RUSH state (in this example, the character display of "small hit RUSH rush" is performed on the movable body 32, and the movable body 32 is an image. An effect of moving to the front surface of the display device 5. See FIG. 8-41 (8).
Is controlled to execute (step 014IWS307). And step 014IWS
Move to 304. The small hit transition condition establishment flag is reset before the processing of step 014IWS307.

The value of the small hit count counter for production is "0" (Y in step 014IWS301), and
And when the small hit transition condition establishment flag is not set (step 014IWS305)
N), that is, when the second transition condition is not set, the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the meter increase effect (step 014IWS309). Then, the process proceeds to step 014IWS304.

In step 014IWS310, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the meter increase effect (step 014IWS110), and resets the meter increase effect flag if it is the end timing (step 014IWS111).

When the meter increase effect that increases the meter displayed in the small hit meter effect is executed by the processing of steps 014IWS303, S307, and S309, the battle challenge effect or chance battle effect that is executed in parallel is performed. It may be configured to control the story progress to be temporarily stopped. With such a configuration, attention can be focused on the small hit meter effect and the meter increase effect, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In this feature unit 014IW, regardless of whether or not the second transition condition is set, the small hit meter effect suggesting the establishment of the second transition condition is executed in parallel with the battle challenge effect or the chance battle effect. However, if the second transition condition is not set, the meter displayed by the small hit meter effect will not be full. Therefore, the meter increase effect executed by the process of step 014IWS309 is step 01.
4 The effect mode different from the meter increase effect executed by the processing of IWS 303 (for example, a mode in which the scale of the meter is difficult to increase) may be set.

Next, an effect mode of the effect executed in the feature unit 014IW will be described. First, the production mode of the battle challenge production will be described. 8-37 and 8-38 are shown in FIGS. 8-37 and 8-38.
It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the battle challenge production. In FIGS. 8-37 and 8-38, the display screens transition in the order of (1), (2), (3), and so on.

When the battle challenge effect is executed after the big hit game by the first special figure game, an image is displayed as an effect explanation part from the first variation to the fifteenth variation after the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (1). In the device 5, a battle challenge commentary image 014IW001 for explaining the contents of the battle challenge production and the story is displayed.

Next, when the story shifts to the first battle section from the 16th variation to the 40th variation after the big hit game, as the first battle effect, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (2), the ally in the image display device 5 Display control is performed in which the character 014IW002 and the enemy character A014IW003a battle.

Then, at the 40th variation, in the image display device 5, the ally character 014IW002
The display control for notifying the victory or defeat of the battle with the enemy character A014IW003a is performed, and when the battle is won, the battle challenge production is continued as shown in FIG. 8-37 (3-1). Battle challenge continuation notification image 014IW0 for notification
04a (in this example, the character display of "continue battle challenge" is included) is displayed. On the other hand, when the battle is defeated, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (3-2), the battle challenge end notification image 014IW004b for notifying that the battle challenge production is completed (
In this example, the character display of "battle challenge end" is included), the battle challenge production ends, and the state shifts to the normal state (non-KT state).

Further, if the battle is won and this victory is the final victory, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (3-3), in order to notify that the battle challenge production is completed and the game shifts to the small hit RUSH. Small hit RUSH rush notification image 014IW004c (in this example, the character display of "small hit RUSH rush" is included) is displayed, the battle challenge production is completed, and the small hit RUS
It shifts to H (second KT state).

The example shown in FIG. 8-37 (3-1) corresponds to any of the first to third effect patterns and the first special effect pattern of the battle challenge effect, and is an example shown in FIG. 8-37 (3-2). Corresponds to the fourth effect pattern of the battle challenge effect, and the example shown in FIG. 8-37 (3-3) corresponds to the second special effect pattern of the battle challenge effect.

Next, in the battle challenge production, when the enemy character A is defeated in the first battle production of the first battle part, the story shifts to the second battle part. And from the 41st fluctuation to the 65th
After shifting to the second battle section up to the fluctuation point, as the second battle effect, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (4), the ally character 014IW002 and the enemy character B are displayed in the image display device 5.
Display control is performed to battle with 014IW003b. Here, when the continuation suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (4), the image display device 5 wins the next battle and suggests that the battle challenge effect is continued. Continuation suggestion image 014IW00
5 (in this example, the character display of "There is a chance!" Is included) is displayed.

Then, at the 65th variation, in the image display device 5, the ally character 014IW002
The display control for notifying the victory or defeat of the battle with the enemy character A014IW003b is performed, and when the battle is won, the battle challenge continuation notification image 014IW004a is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-37 (5-1). To. On the other hand, if you lose the battle,
As shown in FIG. 8-37 (5-2), the battle challenge end notification image 014IW004b
Is displayed, the battle challenge production ends, and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered.

If the battle is won and this victory is the final victory, the small hit RUSH rush notification image 014IW004c is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-37 (5-3), and the battle challenge production is completed. , Shift to small hit RUSH (second KT state).

The example shown in FIG. 8-37 (5-1) corresponds to any of the first and second production patterns of the battle challenge production, and the example shown in FIG. 8-37 (5-2) corresponds to the battle challenge production. It corresponds to the third effect pattern, and the example shown in FIG. 8-37 (3-3) corresponds to the first special effect pattern of the battle challenge effect.

Next, in the battle challenge production, when the enemy character B is defeated in the second battle production of the second battle part, the story shifts to the third battle part. And from the 66th fluctuation to the 90th
After shifting to the third battle section up to the fluctuation point, as the third battle effect, as shown in FIG. 8-38 (6), the ally character 014IW002 and the enemy character C are displayed in the image display device 5.
Display control is performed to battle with 014IW003c.

Then, at the 90th variation, in the image display device 5, the ally character 014IW002
The display control is performed to notify the victory or defeat of the battle between the enemy character A014IW003b and the enemy character A014IW003b, and when the battle is won, as shown in FIG. 8-38 (7-1), the small hit RUS
The H rush notification image 014IW004c is displayed, the battle challenge effect is completed, and the game shifts to the small hit RUSH (second KT state). On the other hand, if you lose the battle, Figure 8-38
As shown in (7-2), the battle challenge end notification image 014IW004b is displayed, the battle challenge effect ends, and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered.

The example shown in FIG. 8-38 (7-1) corresponds to the first production pattern of the battle challenge production, and the example shown in FIG. 8-38 (7-2) corresponds to the second production pattern of the battle challenge production. To do.

Next, the production mode of the chance battle effect will be described. 8-39 and 8-40
Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production mode of the chance battle effect. In FIGS. 8-39 and 8-40, the display screens transition in the order of (1), (2), (3), and so on.

When the chance battle effect is executed after the big hit game by the second special figure game, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (1), as the effect explanation part from the first variation to the fifteenth variation after the big hit game, as shown in FIG.
In the image display device 5, the chance battle commentary image 014IW011 for explaining the contents of the chance battle effect and the story is displayed.

Next, when the story shifts to the first battle section from the 16th variation to the 40th variation after the big hit game, as the first battle effect, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (2), the ally in the image display device 5. Display control is performed in which the character 014IW002 and the enemy character A014IW003a battle.

Then, at the 40th variation, in the image display device 5, the ally character 014IW002
The display control is performed to notify the victory or defeat of the battle with the enemy character A014IW003a, and when the battle is won, the notification that the game ball has been given is notified as shown in FIG. 8-39 (3-1). The game ball grant notification image 014IW012a (in this example, the character display of "game ball get" is included) is displayed. On the other hand, if the battle is defeated, the game ball is not given, so as shown in FIG. 8-39 (3-2), the game ball grant notification image 014
IW012a is not displayed.

In addition, if the battle is won and this victory is the final victory, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (3-3), in order to notify that the chance battle production is completed and the game shifts to the small hit RUSH. Small hit RUSH rush notification image 014IW012b (In this example, "small hit RUSH rush"
(Including the character display of) is displayed, the chance battle production is finished, and the small hit RUSH (
Shift to the second KT state).

The example shown in FIG. 8-39 (3-1) corresponds to any of the first and second production patterns and the first special production pattern of the chance battle production, and the first to fourth grants of the game ball granting pattern. The example corresponding to any of the patterns and shown in FIG. 8-39 (3-2) corresponds to any of the first and second production patterns and the first special production pattern of the chance battle production, and a game ball is given. Corresponding to any of the 5th to 8th grant patterns of the pattern, FIG. 8-39 (3)
The example shown in -3) corresponds to the second special production pattern of the chance battle production.

Next, in the chance battle production, regardless of the victory or defeat of the first battle production of the first battle section,
The story shifts to the second battle section (however, in the case of the second special production pattern, the chance battle production ends when the first battle part ends). And from the 41st fluctuation to the 65th
After shifting to the second battle section up to the fluctuation point, as the second battle effect, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (4), the ally character 014IW002 and the enemy character B are displayed in the image display device 5.
Display control is performed to battle with 014IW003b.

Then, at the 65th variation, in the image display device 5, the ally character 014IW002
The display control is performed to notify the winner of the battle with the enemy character B014IW003b, and when the battle is won, it is notified that the game ball has been given as shown in FIG. 8-39 (5-1). The game ball grant notification image 014IW012a is displayed. On the other hand, when the battle is defeated, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (5-2), the game ball grant notification image 014IW012a is not displayed.

If the battle is won and this victory is the final victory, the small hit RUSH rush notification image 014IW012b is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-39 (5-3), and the chance battle effect is completed. , Shift to small hit RUSH (second KT state).

The example shown in FIG. 8-39 (5-1) corresponds to any of the first and second production patterns of the chance battle effect, and the first and second grant patterns and the fifth and fifth of the game ball grant patterns.
The example corresponding to any of the sixth grant patterns and shown in FIG. 8-39 (5-2) corresponds to any of the first and second effect patterns of the chance battle effect, and is the first of the game ball grant patterns. Corresponds to any of the 3rd to 4th grant patterns and the 7th to 8th grant patterns, and is shown in FIG. 8-39.
The example shown in (5-3) corresponds to the first special effect pattern of the chance battle effect.

Next, in the chance battle production, regardless of the victory or defeat of the second battle production of the second battle section,
The story shifts to the 3rd battle section (however, in the case of the 1st special production pattern, the chance battle production ends when the 2nd battle part ends). And from the 66th fluctuation to the 90th
After shifting to the third battle section up to the fluctuation point, as the third battle effect, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (6), the ally character 014IW002 and the enemy character C are displayed in the image display device 5.
Display control is performed to battle with 014IW003c.

Then, at the 90th variation, in the image display device 5, the ally character 014IW002
The display control is performed to notify the winner of the battle with the enemy character C014IW003c, and when the battle is won, it is notified that the game ball has been given as shown in FIG. 8-40 (7-1). The game ball grant notification image 014IW012a is displayed. On the other hand, when the battle is defeated, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (7-2), the game ball grant notification image 014IW012a is not displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 8-40 (7-1) corresponds to any of the first and second production patterns of the chance battle production, and the first, third, fifth, and seventh grants of the game ball granting pattern. The example corresponding to any of the patterns and shown in FIG. 8-40 (7-2) corresponds to any of the first and second production patterns of the chance battle production, and the second and second game ball giving patterns. 4, 6th
, Corresponds to any of the eighth grant patterns.

Next, at the 90th variation, after the end of the third battle effect, a rush determination effect for notifying whether or not to shift to the small hit RUSH is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-40 (8), in the rush determination effect, a game ball image 014IW013 showing the game balls given so far is displayed (FIG. 8).
In the example of −40 (8), three spheres are displayed, and it is shown that three game balls are given. ). Then, in the rush determination effect, it is notified whether or not to shift to the small hit RUSH depending on the mode in which the displayed game ball is used.

When shifting to the small hit RUSH, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (9-1), the small hit R
The USH rush notification image 014IW012b is displayed, the chance battle effect is completed, and the system shifts to the small hit RUSH (second KT state). On the other hand, when it is not shifted to the small hit RUSH, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (9-2), the chance battle end notification image 014IW012
c is displayed, the chance battle effect ends, and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered.

The example shown in FIG. 8-40 (9-1) corresponds to the first production pattern of the chance battle production.
The example shown in FIG. 8-40 (7-2) corresponds to the second effect pattern of the chance battle effect.

Next, an effect mode of the small hit meter effect will be described. FIG. 8-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the small hit meter effect. In addition, in FIG. 8-41, (1) (2)
(3) The display screen changes in the order of ...

When a battle challenge production or a chance battle production is executed after the jackpot game, Fig. 8
As shown in −41 (1), in the image display device 5, the ally character 014IW002
Display control is performed in which the enemy character A014IW003a and the enemy character A014IW003a battle.

Further, in the feature unit 014IW, when the battle challenge effect or the chance battle effect is executed, the small hit meter effect is executed in parallel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (1), the image display device 5 In, the meter image 014IW021 is displayed. In addition, it should be noted.
Examples of battle challenge effects shown in FIGS. 8-37 and 8-38, and FIGS. 8-39 and 8
In the example of the chance battle effect shown in -40, the meter image 014IW is used to simplify the explanation.
Although 021 is not displayed, it is actually displayed as shown in FIG. 8-41 (1).

Here, when a small hit occurs and the small hit game is in progress, the image display device 5 is shown in FIGS. 8-41 (2), (3), and (4) as a meter increasing effect of the small hit meter effect. In, when the mini character 014IW023 appears and a block is thrown toward the meter image 014IW021, the scale of the meter increases (in the example of FIG. 8-41, the shaded area in the meter increases). It is said. After that, every time a small hit occurs, a meter increase effect is executed in which the scale of the meter increases. In addition, when the small hit game is in progress in the second KT state, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the special winning opening, so an effect emphasizing that the small hit game state is controlled is executed (for example, an image). The display device 5 displays an image indicating that the small hit game is in progress), and when the small hit game is in progress in the first KT state, it is difficult for the game ball to win the special winning opening, so the small hit game It is also possible not to perform an effect that emphasizes that the state is controlled. Further, in this example, during the small hit game, the video of the battle effect in the battle challenge effect or the chance battle effect is continuously played, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, for example, the battle effect. Control may be performed to temporarily stop the progress of the story.

As shown in FIG. 8-41 (5), in the image display device 5, the ally character 014IW
When the display control is performed in which 002 and the enemy character B014IW003b battle, a small hit occurs, and when the small hit game is in progress, the meter increase effect of the small hit meter effect is shown in FIGS. 8-41 (6), As shown in (7), in the image display device 5, the mini character 0
14IW023 appeared, and when I threw a block toward the meter image 014IW021,
Display control is performed to increase the scale of the meter.

Here, when the number of small hits reaches a predetermined number (30 or 70 in this example) and the second transition condition is satisfied, the image display device 5 is shown in FIG. 8-41 (8). In, the display control to fill up the meter is performed, and as a transition notification effect, "small hit RUSH" is performed.
The movable body 32 on which the character "rush" is displayed is controlled to move to the front surface of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 8-41, the feature unit 014IW has a common battle challenge effect or chance battle effect that suggests the establishment of the first transition condition and a small hit meter effect that suggests the establishment of the second transition condition. It is feasible in the period of. In addition, the small hit meter effect can be executed in a manner in which the visibility is lower than that of the battle challenge effect and the chance battle effect. Specifically, in the small hit meter effect, the display size of the character or the like is smaller than in the battle challenge effect and the chance battle effect, and the display position is also a position away from the center of the display area of the image display device 5. With such a configuration, while paying attention mainly to the battle challenge production or the chance battle production, by executing the small hit meter production at the same time, the interest is given to both the first transition condition and the second transition condition. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The effect suggesting the establishment of the second transition condition (that is, the transition to the small hit RUSH state) is not limited to the effect mode such as the small hit meter effect of this example, and for example, the image display device 5
The display mode of the display area at the edge of the display screen and the light emission mode of the lamp provided separately from the image display device 5 change to a mode suggesting the number of small hits (for example, white → blue → green → red → rainbow). The color changes in the order of (1), and when the color becomes rainbow, the establishment of the second transition condition is confirmed).
In addition, depending on whether or not the second transition condition is set and the type of the set second transition condition, the production mode of the effect suggesting the establishment of the second transition condition is determined at a different ratio. May be good. That is, the effect mode of the effect suggesting the establishment of the second transition condition may suggest the degree of expectation that the second transition condition is satisfied and the transition to the small hit RUSH state is established. In this case, among a plurality of types of effect modes, the effect mode with high visibility of the effect (for example, the display size of the image related to the effect is large, the display position is close to the center of the display area of the image display device 5, etc.). However, the degree of expectation that the second transition condition is satisfied and the transition to the small hit RUSH state may be increased. Further, the effect suggesting the establishment of the second transition condition may be executed not only during the small hit game but also during the variable display.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 014IW may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine configured so that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. FIG. 8-42 shows
It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the case which the setting value can be changed. Of these, Fig. 8-42
(A) shows the winning probability of the big hit and the winning probability of the small hit for each set value in the non-probability change state (low probability state). Further, FIG. 8-42 (B) shows the winning probability of a big hit and the winning probability of a small hit for each set value in the probability variation state (high probability state). Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 8-42, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6".
Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-42 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability "255/65536". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-42 (B),
In the probabilistic state (high probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state), and when the set value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536".
It is the lowest and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2550/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding small hits, as shown in FIGS. 8-42 (A) and (B), the set values "1" to
Regardless of which of "6", and regardless of whether it is a non-probability state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state), the small hit probability is "62986/65536". It is constant. As shown in FIGS. 8-42 (A) and (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. By making the set values "1" to "6" different, the number of determined values for each set value may be matched. With such a configuration, since the small hit probability is constant regardless of the set value, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high. In addition, FIG. 8-42 (A),
In (B), the small hit probabilities are matched and the miss probabilities are different between the probabilistic state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state), but the non-probability state (high probability state) is the non-probability state (high probability state). As the jackpot probability increases with respect to the low probability state), the small hit probability may be lowered as compared with the non-probability change state (low probability state), and the missed probabilities may be matched. Further, even if the set values are different in, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched respectively. As a result, in a game machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6 or a game machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a type of game machine having a setting change function in 6 stages and a hardware / software configuration. Can be standardized and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 8-42 (A) and 8-42 (B), the determination value may be set so that the set value "6" may be out of alignment in the probabilistic state. By doing so, since there may be a deviation when all the set values are set, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the settings by the player and improve the interest.

Further, when the configuration shown by the feature unit 014IW is applied to a pachinko gaming machine configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the jackpot changes according to the set value, the fluctuation display or the jackpot game is in progress. And at least one of the small hit games, a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value may be executed. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only when the KT state (or the second KT state) is controlled. As the setting suggestion effect, for example, the variable display setting suggestion effect executed during the variable display, the big hit medium setting suggestion effect executed during the big hit game, and the small hit medium setting suggestion effect executed during the small hit game. , It may be possible to execute by a plurality of types of effect modes in which the reliability of the suggestion is different, or the reliability of the suggestion may be different for each type of the setting suggestion effect. Further, the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be set to be set. For example, the administrator of the game machine may be able to change the setting so as not to execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects, or to lower (or increase) the execution ratio. For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the push button 31 is displayed.
By operating the operation means such as B or the operation means (operable only by the administrator) such as a switch provided inside the game machine, the setting related to the setting suggestion effect may be changed.

As described above, the feature unit 014IW discloses a configuration for solving the following problems. That is, some gaming machines are configured to be controllable in a special state (for example, small hit RUSH) in which a game value is more likely to be given by a special state (small hit game state) than in a normal state. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127, when a predetermined number of variable displays are performed in a probability variation mode in which a high probability state and a time saving state are performed, it is possible to shift to a small hit RUSH mode in which small hits are generated frequently. Are listed.

However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127, it is clear that in the probabilistic mode, the variable display is performed a specified number of times to shift to the small hit RUSH mode. Cannot be improved.

Therefore, in this feature unit 014IW, the following configurations (means A1) to (means A8) are disclosed in order to solve the problem of providing a game machine capable of improving the game entertainment.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display (for example, variable display of a special symbol or decorative symbol), and is a variable means that can be changed into an approachable state and an approachable state (for example, a variable display). A special variable winning ball device 17), a special state control means that can control a special state in which the variable means can enter (for example, a small hit game state), and a special state (for example, a special state in which the game value is easily given by the special state). , A special state control means that can be controlled to the second KT state) and a first condition (for example, the first condition) related to the variable display number when controlled to a non-special state (for example, the first KT state) different from the special state. The first transition condition) and the second condition different from the first condition (for example, the second condition)
Based on the fact that one of the transition conditions is satisfied, a transition means capable of transitioning from the non-special state to the special state (for example, the CPU 103 steps 014IWS001B to 014).
It is characterized by having a part for executing IWS015B).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give diversity to the conditions for transitioning to the special state, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Means A2) In the means A1, the second condition is a condition that can be satisfied based on the number of times the control of the special state is executed (for example, the number of times the small hit game state occurs), and is derived and displayed as a variable display result. There may be a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) in which the special state is sometimes controlled, and a non-special display result (for example, a missed symbol) in which the special state is not controlled.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the number of times the special display result is derived and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, a plurality of types of second conditions having different advantages (for example, a second transition condition A that is satisfied by the occurrence of 30 small hit game states, and 70 small hit game states). The second transition condition B) that is satisfied by the occurrence of
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and to pay attention to the type of the second condition, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Means A4) A plurality of types of first means having different advantages in any one of means A1 to means A3.
The first transition condition A or 65 which has a condition (for example, is satisfied by executing the variation display 90 times).
The first transition condition B, which is satisfied by executing the variable display of 40 times, and the first transition condition C), which is satisfied by executing the variable display 40 times, may be set.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games, to pay attention to the type of the first condition, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Means A5) In any of means A1 to A4, an advantageous state control means capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player is provided, and the advantageous state control means has an advantage in the advantageous state. May be controllable to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, probabilistic jackpots B to F) in which the conditions for transitioning to the special state are common (for example, the number of rounds is common in 5R). ..
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games, to pay attention to the types of advantageous states, and to improve the interest of games.

(Means A6) In any of means A1 to A5, the non-special state has a lower advantage than the special state, and the disadvantageous special state (for example, the first K) in which the game value is less likely to be given by the special state.
It may be in the T state).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of games.

(Means A7) In any of means A1 to means A6, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) and a specific state (for example, a high probability state) that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state. The specific state control means and the second transition means (for example, CPU 103) capable of transitioning from the non-special state to the normal state based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied while being controlled to the non-specific state. It is provided with steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS007B (a part for executing 014IWS007B) and has a plurality of types of first conditions (for example, the first transition condition A which is satisfied by executing 90 times of variation display and is established by executing 65 times of variation display). First transition condition B
, The first transition condition C) that is satisfied by executing the variable display 40 times may be set.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games, to pay attention to the type of the first condition, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Means A8) In means A7, when controlled to a non-special state, a common effect of a common mode (for example, a battle challenge) between the case of being controlled to a specific state and the case of being controlled to a non-specific state. A common production execution means that can execute a production or a chance battle production, and a notification production (for example, a battle challenge production or a chance battle production) that notifies whether the common production continues or ends according to the type of the first condition. (Each battle effect in the above) may be provided with a notification effect execution means capable of executing the effect.
According to such a configuration, when the common effect is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to guess which of the specific state and the non-specific state is controlled, so that the game interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to pay attention to whether the common production continues or ends, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the feature unit 014IW discloses a configuration for solving the following problems. That is, some gaming machines are configured to be controllable in a special state (for example, small hit RUSH) in which a game value is more likely to be given by a special state (small hit game state) than in a normal state. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127, when a predetermined number of variable displays are performed in a probability variation mode in which a high probability state and a time saving state are performed, it is possible to shift to a small hit RUSH mode in which small hits are generated frequently. Are listed.

However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127, a probabilistic variation mode, a non-probability variation time saving mode, and a small hit RUSH mode are provided as effect modes, and in the probability variation mode, a specified number of variable displays are performed. Since it is clear that the mode shifts to the small hit RUSH mode, it is not possible to sufficiently improve the game entertainment.

Therefore, in this feature unit 014IW, the following configurations (means B1) to (means B6) are disclosed in order to solve the problem of providing a game machine capable of improving the game entertainment.

(Means B1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 17) that can be changed into an enterable state and a difficult-to-enter state, and a special state (for example, a special variable state in which the variable means can enter). A special state control means that can control a small hit game state), a special state control means that can control a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value is easily given by the special state, and a non-special state different from the special state. When controlled to a state (for example, the first KT state), one of the first condition (for example, the first transition condition) and the second condition (for example, the second transition condition) different from the first condition A transition means capable of transitioning from a non-special state to a special state based on the establishment (for example, the CPU 103 steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS015).
A part that executes B), a first suggestion effect that suggests the establishment of the first condition (for example, a battle challenge effect or a chance battle effect), and a second suggestion effect that suggests the establishment of the second condition (for example,).
It is characterized in that it is provided with a suggestion effect executing means that can be executed in a mode different from that of the small hit meter effect (see, for example, FIGS. 8-41).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give diversity to the conditions for transitioning to the special state, and it is possible to pay attention to whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, which improves the game entertainment. be able to.

(Means B2) In means B1, a gaming machine that performs variable display, the first condition is a condition that can be satisfied based on the number of variable display times (for example, the number of executions of variable display), and the second condition is.
The condition may be satisfied based on the number of times the control of the special state is executed (for example, the number of times the small hit game state occurs).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the variable display number and the execution number of the control of the special state, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(Means B3) In means B1 or means B2, the suggestion effect executing means executes the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect in a common period (for example, a period controlled by the battle challenge mode or the chance battle mode). It is possible, and the second suggestion effect may be executed in an manner in which the visibility is lower than that of the first suggestion effect (see, for example, FIGS. 8-41 and the like).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to both the first condition and the second condition by executing the second suggestion effect at the same time while mainly paying attention to the first suggestion effect.
It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Means B4) In any one of means B1 to means B3, control is performed between a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) and a specific state (for example, a high probability state) that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state. A possible specific state control means and a second transition means (for example, a second transition means capable of transitioning from the non-special state to the normal state based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied when the non-specific state is controlled. CPU 103 steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS007B
(Part to execute) and has a plurality of types of first conditions (for example, a first transition condition A satisfied by executing 90 fluctuation displays and a first transition satisfied by executing 65 fluctuation displays). Condition B, the first transition condition C) that is satisfied by executing the fluctuation display 40 times may be set.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games, to pay attention to the type of the first condition, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Means B5) In means B4, when controlled to a non-special state, a common effect of a common mode (for example, a battle challenge) depending on whether the device is controlled to a specific state or a non-specific state. A common production execution means that can execute a production or a chance battle production, and a notification production (for example, a battle challenge production or a chance battle production) that notifies whether the common production continues or ends according to the type of the first condition. (Each battle effect in the above) may be provided with a notification effect execution means capable of executing the effect.
According to such a configuration, when the common effect is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to guess which of the specific state and the non-specific state is controlled, so that the game interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to pay attention to whether the common production continues or ends, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Means B6) The means B5 may be provided with a continuation suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a continuation suggestion effect (for example, a continuation suggestion effect) suggesting that the common effect continues before the execution of the notification effect. ..
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the attention of the notification effect before the execution of the notification effect.
It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Outline of feature 19SH)
Next, the game machine related to the feature unit 19SH will be described. In the description of the gaming machine according to the feature unit 19SH, FIGS. 1 to 8-42 are appropriately referred to.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of controlling a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player will be described as an example.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 19SH includes variable display means for executing variable display. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a CPU 103 that executes a special figure game.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 19SH includes a specific display means for displaying a specific display capable of specifying the number of times the variable display is executed after the advantageous state ends. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes an effect control CPU 120 that displays a variation number display capable of specifying the number of executions of the special figure game executed after the jackpot game state ends.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 19SH includes a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting an expectation degree controlled in an advantageous state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes an effect control CPU 120 that executes a notice effect suggesting a controlled expectation of a jackpot game state.

The variable display means according to the feature unit 19SH can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel. The CPU 103 of this embodiment can execute the first special figure game and the second special figure game in parallel.

The specific display means according to the feature unit 19SH can display the specific display so that the total number of times the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the number of times the variable display of the second identification information is executed can be specified.
The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can display the variation number display so that the total number of times of execution of the first special figure game and the number of times of execution of the second special figure game can be specified.

The suggestion effect execution means according to the feature unit 19SH can execute the suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state by displaying the specific display in a specific mode different from the normal mode as the suggestion effect. .. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is used as a notice effect.
By displaying the fluctuation number display larger than the normal size or by applying an effect to the fluctuation number display, it is possible to execute a fluctuation number display notice that suggests the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state.

The suggestion effect executing means according to the feature unit 19SH can execute the specific suggestion effect for the variable display of the first identification information when controlled to a predetermined gaming state different from the advantageous state, and the second
The specific suggestion effect is not executed for the variable display of the identification information. Production control C of this embodiment
When the PU 120 is controlled to a low probability / low base state (normal state) different from the jackpot game state, the variation number display notice can be executed for the first special figure game, and the second special figure game can be executed. The change number display notice is not executed for.

The specific display means according to the feature unit 19SH updates the mode of the specific display according to the variable display of the second identification information even when the variable display of the first identification information is not executed. To do. Even when the first special figure game is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is executed after the jackpot game state is completed in response to the execution of the second special figure game. The number displayed for the number of fluctuations, which indicates the number of times the special figure game has been executed, is updated.

The specific display means according to the feature unit 19SH updates the mode of the specific display when the variable display of the second identification information is started while the specific suggestion effect is executed for the variable display of the first identification information. .. When the second special figure game is started while the effect number display notice is being executed for the first special figure game, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment updates the number of the fluctuation number display.

The suggestion effect executing means according to the feature unit 19SH is variable in the first identification information when the variable display of the second identification information is started while the specific suggestion effect is being executed for the variable display of the first identification information. Even if the variable display of the second identification information is not finished when the display is finished, the specific suggestion effect is finished. When the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment starts the second special figure game while executing the variation number display notice for the first special figure game, or when the first special figure game ends. Even if the second special figure game is not finished, the fluctuation number display notice is finished.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9-1, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the look-ahead advance notice setting process (step S161).
In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

In this embodiment, when a valid start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening, a first holding storage number addition designation command is transmitted to specify that the first reserved storage number is increased by 1, and the second starting winning opening is transmitted. When the valid start winning prize is generated, the second hold storage number addition designation command for designating that the second hold storage number has been increased by 1 is transmitted. In addition, when a valid start winning is generated in any of the starting winning openings, a look-ahead judgment of the display result, the fluctuation pattern, etc. in the special figure game is performed, and a winning judgment result specification command for specifying the judgment result is transmitted. To. When the first special figure game is started, the first reserved memory number subtraction specification command for specifying that the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 is transmitted, and when the second special figure game is started. , Since the second hold storage number subtraction specification command for specifying that the second hold storage number has decreased by 1 is transmitted, the effect control board 12
The number of first reserved storage and the number of second reserved storage can also be grasped on the side. In step S161, based on the winning determination result specification command, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed, and from the first hold storage number addition designation command and the second hold storage number addition designation command. A process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the specified number of hold storages. Also, when the first hold storage number subtraction specification command and the second hold storage number subtraction specification command are received, the process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the hold storage number specified from those commands. Will be done.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 executes the small symbol variable display process (step 19SHS1). In the small symbol variable display process, for example, the main board 11
Based on the effect control command at the start of the fluctuation and the effect control command at the stop of the variable display transmitted from, the process for executing the variable display of the small symbol is executed. Further, based on the reception of the effect control command at the start of the fluctuation, a process for updating the number of the fluctuation number display indicating the number of executions of the special figure game executed after the jackpot game state ends is executed.

Here, the small symbols are the first small symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the first special symbol game and smaller than the decorative symbol, and the second small symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the second special symbol game and is smaller than the decorative symbol. Small symbols and are included. The small symbol may be one that is always displayed or one that is displayed only for a predetermined period.

In this embodiment, when the first special figure game is started, the first variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the first special figure game. And when the display result specification command is transmitted and the second special figure game is started, the second variation that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the second special figure game. A pattern specification command and a display result specification command are transmitted. Further, when the first special figure game is ended, a first symbol confirmation designation command that can specify the end of the first special figure game is transmitted, and when the second special figure game is finished, the second special figure game is finished. The second symbol confirmation specification command that can specify the end of is transmitted. In step 19SHS1, a process for starting the variable display of the small symbol is executed based on the variation pattern specification command and the display result specification command, and the variable display of the small symbol is stopped based on the symbol confirmation specification command. The process is executed. Further, based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern specification command, the process for updating the number of fluctuation count display is executed.

After executing the process of step 19SHS1, the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, a RAM.
Depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in 122, the following steps S170 to
One of the processes of S177 is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".
Ends the variable display start waiting process.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, various notice effects, and the like. It is determined whether or not the effect is executed, its mode, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, the value of the set effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display processing, the effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands to the voice control board 13, and outputting game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting commands to the lamp control board 14. Performs various effect controls during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / blinking. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. Corresponding to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the command reception waiting time elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". , The value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect eigyo pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. To execute. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120
For example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state is set, and various effect controls are executed at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 12
0 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Variable display processing of small symbols)
FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the small symbol variable display process executed in step 19SHS1 of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9-1.

In the small symbol variable display process shown in FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the small symbol is being variablely displayed (step 19SHS11). Step 19SH
In the process of S11, for example, it may be determined whether or not the small symbol is being variably displayed based on the timer value of the small symbol effect process timer or the like.

When the small symbol is not being variablely displayed in step 19SHS11 (step 19SHS1)
1; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received (step 19SHS12).

When the variation pattern designation command is received in step 19SHS12 (step 19SHS12; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol which is the final stop symbol as the display result of the small symbol (step 19SHS13). Step 19SHS
In the process of 13, for example, the final stop symbol is determined based on the variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 and the display result indicated by the display result specification command. do it. When the first variation pattern designation command is received, the final stop symbol of the first small symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the first special symbol game is determined.
Further, when the second variation pattern designation command is received, the final stop symbol of the second small symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the second special symbol game is determined.

After executing the process of step 19SHS13, the effect control CPU 120 determines the small symbol effect control pattern to one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step 19SHS).
14). In the process of step 19SHS13, for example, one of a plurality of prepared small symbol effect control patterns may be selected and set as a usage pattern in accordance with the final stop symbol determined in step 19SHS13. When performing variable display of the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol game, one of a plurality of prepared first small symbol effect control patterns is selected.
Set as a usage pattern. Further, when performing variable display of the second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol game, one of a plurality of prepared second small symbol effect control patterns is selected and set as a usage pattern.

After executing the process of step 19SHS14, the effect control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the small symbol effect effect process timer (step 19SHS15). Step 19 SHS1
In the process 5, for example, the initial value of the small symbol effect process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 may be set corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command. When the first small symbol is variably displayed in response to the first special symbol game, the initial value of the first small symbol effect process timer is set. Further, when the second small symbol is variably displayed in response to the second special symbol game, the initial value of the second small symbol effect effect process timer is set.

After executing the process of step 19SHS15, the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for starting the variable display of the small symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 19SHS).
16). In the process of step 19SHS16, for example, the image display device 5 is transmitted to the display control unit 123 a display control command specified by the display control data included in the small symbol effect control pattern determined in step 19SHS14. The variable display of the small symbol may be started in the small symbol display area provided on the screen of. When the first special symbol game is started, the variable display of the first small symbol may be started in the first small symbol display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, when the second special symbol game is started, the variable display of the second small symbol may be started in the second small symbol display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After executing the process of step 19SHS16, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the fluctuation number counter (step 19SHS17). The fluctuation number counter is a counter that counts the number of executions of the special figure game executed after the jackpot game state ends. For example, when the jackpot game state is controlled, it is cleared to the initial value "0". To.

After executing the process of step 19SHS17, the effect control CPU 120 sets the update of the variation number display (step 19SHS18), and ends the small symbol variable display process. In the process of step 19SHS18, for example, the number of the fluctuation number display indicating the number of executions of the special figure game executed after the jackpot game state ends is updated so as to be the value of the fluctuation number counter.

In this way, when the first special symbol game is started, the variable display of the first small symbol is started in the first small symbol display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, when the second special symbol game is started, the variable display of the second small symbol is started in the second small symbol display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, regardless of whether the game is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, when the special figure game is started, a variation indicating the number of times the special figure game is executed after the jackpot game state ends. The number displayed is updated.

If the variation pattern designation command is not received in step 19SHS12 (step 19SHS12; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the small symbol variable display process.

In this way, when neither the first special figure game nor the second special figure game is started, the variable display of the small symbol is not started. Further, when neither the first special figure game nor the second special figure game is started, the number of the variable number display indicating the number of times the special figure game executed after the jackpot game state ends is not updated.

When the small symbol is being variably displayed in step 19SHS11 (step 19SHS1)
1; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a symbol confirmation designation command received (step 19SHS19).

Step 19 When the symbol confirmation specification command is not received in SHS19 (step 19)
SHS19; No), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the timer value of the small symbol effect process timer (step 19SHS20).

After executing the process of step 19SHS20, the effect control CPU 120 sets for display control of the variable display of the small symbol (step 19SHS21), and steps 19SH.
The process of S12 is executed. In the process of step 19SHS21, for example, an instruction or a register value shown in the display control data may be supplied to the display control unit 123.

In this way, when the symbol confirmation designation command is not received, the variable display of the small symbol is continuously executed.

Step 19 When the symbol confirmation designation command is received in SHS19 (step 19)
SHS19; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to derive and display the final stop symbol that is the display result in the variable display of the small symbol, for example, by supplying an instruction or a register value to the display control unit 123 (step 19SHS23). Step 19 The process of SHS12 is executed.

In this way, when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the final stop symbol, which is the display result in the variable display of the small symbol, is derived and displayed.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 9-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process executed in step S170 of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9-1.

In the variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 9-3, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command is received (step 19SHS31).

If the variation pattern designation command is not received in step 19SHS31 (step 19SHS31; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the demo effect in-progress flag is in the ON state (step 19SHS32). The demo production flag is a flag indicating whether or not the customer waiting demonstration display is being performed. When the first demo production flag is on, it indicates that the first customer waiting demonstration display is being performed, and when the first demo production flag is off, the first customer waiting demonstration display is being performed. Indicates that it is not. Further, when the second demo production flag is on, the second customer waiting demonstration display is displayed, and when the second demo production flag is off, the second customer waiting demonstration display is displayed. Indicates that it has not been done.

Step 19 When the demo production flag is off in SHS32 (step 19)
SHS32; No), that is, when the demo effect has not been performed yet, the effect control CPU 12
0 executes the demo effect setting process (step 19SHS33). In the demo effect setting process, for example, a process for starting the customer waiting demonstration display is executed based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 when the special figure game or the like is not executed.

In this embodiment, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), when the first special figure game is not played and the first hold memory is not stored, it means that the player is in the first customer waiting state. The specified first customer waiting demo display specification command is transmitted. Further, in the KT state, when the second special figure game is not performed and the second hold memory is not stored, the second customer waiting demo display specification command for specifying the second customer waiting state is transmitted. Will be done. Step 19 SHS3
In the process 3, the process for starting the first customer waiting demonstration display is executed based on the first customer waiting demo display designation command. Further, based on the second customer waiting demo display designation command, a process for starting the second customer waiting demonstration display is executed.

(Demo production setting process)
FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the demo effect setting process executed in step 19SHS33 of the variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 9-3.

In the demo effect setting process shown in FIG. 9-4, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received (step 19SHS41).

When the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received in step 19SHS41 (step 19SHS41; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first demo effect in-progress flag to the on state (step 19SHS42), and the first The first demo effect control pattern corresponding to the demo effect is selected (step 19SHS43), the effect control process timer is started (step 19SHS44), and the demo effect setting process is completed.

In this way, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), when the first special figure game is not performed and the first hold memory is not stored, the first demo effect is executed. .. In the first demo effect, for example, among the advance notice effects executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state), a noteworthy advance notice effect is introduced.

When the first customer waiting demo display designation command is not received in step 19SHS41 (step 19SHS41; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second customer waiting demo display designation command is received (step 19SHS41; No). Step 19SHS45).

When the second customer waiting demo display designation command is received in step 19SHS45 (step 19SHS45; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the second demo effect in-progress flag to the on state (step 19SHS46), and the second The second demo effect control pattern corresponding to the demo effect is selected (step 19SHS47), the effect control process timer is started (step 19SHS44), and the demo effect setting process is completed.

In this way, in the KT state, when the second special figure game is not performed and the second hold memory is not stored, the second demo effect is executed. In the second demo production, for example,
Among the advance notice effects executed in the KT state, notable advance notice effects will be introduced.

If the second customer waiting demo display designation command is not received in step 19SHS45 (step 19SHS45; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the demo effect setting process.

In this way, even if the variation pattern designation command is not received, the demo production is not started until the customer waiting demo display designation command is received.

Returning to the description of FIG. 9-3, in step 19SHS32, when the demo effect in-progress flag is on (step 19SHS32; No), that is, when the demo effect has already been performed.
The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a predetermined operation (step 19SHS3).
4).

When there is no predetermined operation in step 19SHS34 (step 19SHS34; No.
), The effect control CPU 120 executes the demo effect process (step 19SHS35), and ends the variable display start wait process. In the process of step 19SHS35, for example, FIG. 9-4.
When the first demo effect control pattern is selected in the process of step 19SHS43 in the demo effect setting process shown in the above, a display control command specified by the display control data included in the first demo effect control pattern is sent to the display control unit 123. The first demo effect may be executed by transmitting the data. Further, for example, step 19S in the demo effect setting process shown in FIG. 9-4.
When the second demo effect control pattern is selected in the processing of the HS47, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the second demo effect control pattern is transmitted to the display control unit 123, or the like. 2 Demonstration production should be executed.

In this way, when the variation pattern designation command is not received, the demo effect continues to be executed unless a predetermined operation is performed.

When there is a predetermined operation in step 19SHS34 (step 19SHS34; Ye
s), the effect control CPU 120 executes the menu process (step 19SHS36),
Ends the variable display start waiting process. In the process of step 19SHS36, for example, a menu is displayed on the image display device 5 so that the player can operate according to the menu contents.

In this way, when the variation pattern designation command is not received, it is possible to perform an operation according to the menu contents by a predetermined operation during the execution of the demo effect.

When the variation pattern designation command is received in step 19SHS31 (step 19SHS31; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a low probability / low base state (normal state). (Step 19SHS37). Step 1
In the processing of 9SHS37, for example, by confirming whether or not the low probability / non-KT background specification command for specifying the background display when the game state is the low probability / low base state (normal state) is received, the current state is received. It suffices to determine whether or not the gaming state is a low probability / low base state (normal state).

In step 19SHS37, when the current gaming state is a low probability / low base state (normal state) (step 19SHS37; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first variable display start waiting process (step 19SHS38). , Ends the variable display start waiting process. In the first variable display start waiting process, for example, a process for ending the first demo effect is executed based on the effect control command at the start of the variation transmitted from the main board 11.

In this embodiment, when the first special figure game is started, the first variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the first special figure game. Is sent. In step 19SHS38, a process for ending the first demo effect is executed based on the first variation pattern designation command.

(First variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 9-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the first variable display start waiting process executed in step 19SHS38 of the variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 9-3.

In the first variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 9-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the received variation pattern designation command is the first variation pattern designation command (step 19SHS51).

In step 19SHS51, when the variation pattern specification command is the first variation pattern specification command (step 19SHS51; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is the first.
It is determined whether or not the demo production flag is on (step 19SHS52).

In step 19SHS52, when the first demo effect during production flag is on (step 19SHS52; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 resets the first demo effect during effect flag to the off state (step 19SHS53), and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step 19SHS54), and the first variable display start waiting process is terminated.

In this way, when the current game state is the low probability / low base state (normal state), the first demo effect is being executed in response to the start of the first special figure game. 1 The demo effect is finished, and the variable display start setting process for executing the variable display of the decorative pattern and the advance notice effect is executed.

In step 19SHS52, when the first demo effect in-progress flag is in the off state (step 19SHS52; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect process flag to "1" corresponding to the variable display start setting process. (Step 19SHS54), and the process of waiting for the start of the first variable display is terminated.

In this way, when the current game state is the low probability / low base state (normal state), the variable display of the decorative symbol and the advance notice effect are executed in response to the start of the first special figure game. The variable display start setting process for this is executed.

In step 19SHS51, if the variation pattern designation command is not the first variation pattern designation command (step 19SHS51; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first variable display start waiting process.

In this way, when the current game state is the low probability / low base state (normal state), even during the execution of the first demo production in response to the start of the second special figure game. The first demo effect is not finished, and the variable display start setting process for executing the variable display of the decorative pattern and the notice effect is not executed. Therefore, when the current game state is a low probability / low base state (normal state), the first demo is being executed if the first demo effect is being executed in response to the start of the second special figure game. The variable display of the second small symbol will be executed during the execution of the effect.

Returning to the description of FIG. 9-3, in step 19SHS37, when the current gaming state is not the low probability / low base state (normal state) (step 19SHS37; No), the effect control CPU.
120 executes the second variable display start waiting process (step 19SHS39), and ends the variable display start waiting process. In the second variable display start waiting process, for example, a process for ending the second demo effect is executed based on the effect control command at the start of the variation transmitted from the main board 11.

In this embodiment, when the second special figure game is started, a second variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the second special figure game. Is sent. In step 19SHS39, a process for ending the second demo effect is executed based on the second variation pattern designation command.

(Processing waiting for the start of the second variable display)
FIG. 9-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the second variable display start waiting process executed in step 19SHS39 of the variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 9-3.

In the second variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 9-6, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the received variation pattern designation command is the second variation pattern designation command (step 19SHS61).

In step 19SHS61, when the variation pattern specification command is the second variation pattern specification command (step 19SHS61; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is the second.
It is determined whether or not the demo production flag is on (step 19SHS62).

In step 19SHS62, when the second demo production flag is on (step 19SHS62; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 resets the second demo effect flag to the off state (step 19SHS63), and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step 19SHS64), and the second variable display start waiting process is terminated.

In this way, when the current game state is the KT state, the second demo production is ended and the decoration is performed if the second demo production is being executed in response to the start of the second special figure game. The variable display start setting process for executing the variable display of the symbol and the advance notice effect is executed.

In step 19SHS62, when the second demo effect in-progress flag is in the off state (step 19SHS62; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect process flag to "1" corresponding to the variable display start setting process. (Step 19SHS64), and the second variable display start waiting process is terminated.

In this way, when the current game state is the KT state, the variable display start setting process for executing the variable display of the decorative symbol and the advance notice effect is performed in response to the start of the second special figure game. Will be executed.

In step 19SHS61, if the variation pattern designation command is not the second variation pattern designation command (step 19SHS61; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the second variable display start waiting process.

In this way, when the current game state is the KT state, the second demo production is not ended even during the execution of the second demo production in response to the start of the first special figure game. , The variable display start setting process for executing the variable display of the decorative pattern and the advance notice effect is not executed either. Therefore, when the current game state is the KT state, corresponding to the start of the first special figure game, if the second demo effect is being executed, the first small is being executed during the execution of the second demo effect. The variable display of the symbol will be executed.

In the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9-1, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation number display notice determination process.
In the change number display notice determination process, as a notice effect, the change number display is displayed larger than the normal size, and the change number display is displayed by applying an effect to determine the degree of expectation controlled to the jackpot game state. The process for executing the suggested fluctuation count display notice is executed.

(Fluctuation number display notice decision processing)
FIG. 9-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation number display notice determination process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9-1.

In the variation number display notice determination process shown in FIG. 9-7, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is a low probability / low base state (normal state) (step 19SHS71). In the process of step 19SHS71, for example, the game state has a low probability /
By checking whether the low probability / non-KT background specification command that specifies the background display in the low base state (normal state) is received, the current game state is low probability / low base state (normal state). It suffices to judge whether or not it is.

Here, when the current gaming state is the normal state, the received variation pattern is specified by executing the process of step 19SHS37 and the process of step 19SHS38 in the variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 9-3. Only when the command is the first variation pattern designation command, the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171 of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9-1. That is, when the current game state is the normal state, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special figure game is performed, whereas the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special figure game is performed. I can't.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the KT state, the received variation pattern specification command is executed by executing the process of step 19SHS37 and the process of step 19SHS39 in the variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 9-3. Only when is the second variation pattern designation command, the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171 of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9-1. That is, when the current game state is the KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special figure game is performed, whereas the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special figure game is performed. I can't.

In step 19SHS71, when the current gaming state is the normal state (step 19S).
HS71; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second special figure game in which the display result is a “big hit” is being executed (step 19SHS72). Step 19SH
In the process of S72, for example, based on the timer value of the second small symbol effect effect process timer, it is determined whether or not the second small symbol is in the variable display, and when the second small symbol is in the variable display, it is determined. ,
Based on the second small symbol effect control pattern and the like, it may be determined whether or not the second special figure game in which the display result is a "big hit" is being executed.

In step 19SHS72, when the second special figure game in which the display result is a “big hit” is not being executed (step 19SHS72; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to give notice of the number of fluctuations (step 19SHS73). In the process of step 19SHS73, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the fluctuation number display notice updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for production is extracted, and the fluctuation number display notice determination prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is performed. By referring to the table or the like, it may be determined whether or not there is a notice of displaying the number of fluctuations.

(Fluctuating number display notice decision table)
FIG. 9-8 shows a configuration example of the fluctuation number display notice determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-8, in the fluctuation number display notice determination table, for example, the fluctuation number display is performed according to whether the display result of the first special figure game to be started this time is "miss" or "big hit". It suffices that the numerical value to be compared with the random number value for determining the advance notice is assigned to one of the determination results of "no advance notice" that does not execute the variable display notice and "with notice" that executes the variable display notice. ..

In the variable display notice determination table referred to in step 19SHS73, as shown in FIG. 9-8, when the display result of the first special figure game to be started this time is "missing", the determination ratio of "with notice" is It is set to be lower than the "no notice" decision rate. On the other hand, when the display result of the first special figure game to be started this time is "big hit", the decision rate of "with notice" is set to be higher than the decision rate of "without notice". In addition, when the display result of the first special figure game starting this time is "big hit", the determination rate of "with notice" is higher than when the display result of the first special figure game starting this time is "missing". Is set to. With such a setting, when the variable display notice is executed, the display result of the first special figure game becomes a "big hit" as compared with the case where the variable display notice is not executed, and the game is controlled to the big hit game state. Expectations can be raised.

After executing the process of step 19SHS73, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to be "with notice" (step 19SHS74). Step 19 SHS74
In the case where it is determined that "no notice" has been determined (step 19SHS74; No),
The effect control CPU 120 ends the variation number display notice determination process.

When it is determined in step 19SHS74 that "with notice" is determined (step 19SHS74; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the fluctuation number display notice pattern (step 19SHS75), and performs the change number display notice determination process. finish. Step 19
In the processing of SHS75, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a variation number display notice pattern updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for production is extracted, and ROM1
The variation number display notice pattern may be determined by referring to the variation number display notice pattern determination table stored in advance in 21 and prepared.

(Fluctuating number display notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 9-9 (A) shows a configuration example of the fluctuation number display notice pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), in the fluctuation number display notice pattern determination table, for example, depending on whether the display result of the first special figure game to be started this time is "miss" or "big hit". ,
It suffices if it is assigned to the determination result of any one of the fluctuation number display notice patterns "HP1-1" to "HP1-3".

(Contents of change number display notice)
FIG. 9-9 (B) shows the content of the change number display notice. In this embodiment, FIG.
As shown in -9 (B), "HP1-1" to "HP1-" are used as the fluctuation number display notice patterns.
3 ”is set.

The fluctuation number display notice pattern "HP1-1" is a pattern in which the fluctuation number display is displayed in a normal size by applying an effect. The fluctuation number display notice pattern "HP1-2" is a pattern in which the fluctuation number display is displayed larger than the normal size without applying an effect. The fluctuation number display notice pattern "HP1-3" is a pattern in which the fluctuation number display is displayed larger than the normal size by applying an effect.

In the fluctuation number display notice pattern determination table referred to in step 19SHS75,
As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), when the display result of the first special figure game to be started this time is "missing", the determination ratio of the fluctuation number display notice pattern "HP1-2" is the fluctuation number display notice pattern. It is set to be lower than the determination ratio of "HP1-1". On the other hand, when the display result of the first special figure game to be started this time is "big hit", the determination ratio of the fluctuation number display notice pattern "HP1-2" is the determination ratio of the fluctuation number display notice pattern "HP1-1". Is set to be higher than. With such a setting, when the fluctuation number display notice is executed to display the fluctuation number display larger than the normal size without applying the effect, the fluctuation number display is applied with the effect and displayed in the normal size. Compared with the time when the display notice is executed, the display result of the first special figure game becomes a "big hit", and the degree of expectation that the game is controlled to the big hit game state can be increased.

In addition, when the display result of the first special figure game to be started this time is "missing", the determination ratio of the fluctuation number display notice pattern "HP1-3" is higher than the determination ratio of the fluctuation number display notice pattern "HP1-2". It is set to be low. On the other hand, when the display result of the first special figure game to be started this time is "big hit", the determination ratio of the fluctuation number display notice pattern "HP1-3" is the determination ratio of the fluctuation number display notice pattern "HP1-2". Is set to be higher than. With such a setting, when the fluctuation number display notice is executed, the fluctuation number display is displayed larger than the normal size without applying the effect. Compared with the time when the number display notice is executed, the display result of the first special figure game becomes a "big hit", and the degree of expectation that the game is controlled to the big hit game state can be increased.

In this way, when the current game state is a low probability / low base state (normal state), in other words, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special figure game is variably displayed, the first Corresponding to the special figure game, the display result of the first special figure game becomes a "big hit", and a variable number display notice suggesting that the game is controlled to the big hit game state can be executed. Further, when the current game state is a low probability / low base state (normal state) and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special figure game is variably displayed, the number of fluctuations corresponding to the second special figure game is performed. The display notice is not executed.

In step 19SHS71, when the current gaming state is not the low probability / low base state (normal state) (step 19SHS71; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variation number display notice determination process.

In this way, when the current game state is the KT state, in other words, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special figure game is variably displayed, the number of fluctuations corresponding to the second special figure game is performed. The display notice is not executed.

In step 19SHS72, when the second special figure game in which the display result is "big hit" is being executed (step 19SHS72; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variation number display notice determination process.

In this way, when the current game state is a low probability / low base state (normal state), and when the second special figure game in which the display result is a "big hit" is being executed, the fluctuation number display notice is executed. Not done. As a result, for example, after the change number display notice is executed, the notice target of the change number display notice is the second special figure game because the display result of the second special figure game becomes a "big hit". It is possible to prevent giving a misunderstanding such as.

(Display of the number of fluctuations in the normal state and the production mode of the notice of the number of fluctuations)
Next, the effect mode of the fluctuation number display and the fluctuation number display notice in the low probability / low base state (normal state) will be described. FIG. 9-10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the fluctuation number display and the fluctuation number display notice in the low probability / low base state (normal state).

In FIG. 9-10 (A), the special figure game is executed 44 times after the end of the big hit game state based on the “normal big hit C”, and the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game is stopped. It is a figure which shows the displayed situation.

Here, when the jackpot game state based on the "normal jackpot C" ends, the special figure game is executed 40 times in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game state. Based on this, the game state shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state).
Therefore, in FIG. 9-10 (A), when the game state is the low probability / low base state (normal state), the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special figure game is stopped and displayed. It shows the situation that is being done.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), "left" and "middle" provided on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the display result of the first special figure game being "missing". On the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "right", the fixed decorative symbol whose display result of the decorative symbol is "missing" is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), the display result of the first small symbol is displayed in the first small symbol display area 19SH1 corresponding to the display result of the first special figure game being "missing". The confirmed small symbol that becomes "missing" is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), corresponding to the execution of the second special figure game, the second small symbol display area 19SH2 is synchronized with the second special figure game. Small symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), four hold displays are displayed in the first hold display area 5A, and two hold displays are displayed in the second hold display area 5B.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), the number "44 games" corresponds to the fact that the special figure game was executed 44 times after the end of the jackpot game state based on the "normal jackpot C". 19SH3, which is a variation number display including characters and characters, is displayed.

Then, when the 45th special figure game after the end of the big hit game state based on the "normal big hit C" is started, it is executed after the big hit game state is finished as shown in FIG. 9-10 (B). The number of the fluctuation number display 19SH3 indicating the number of times the special figure game is executed is updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), the number of the fluctuation number display 19SH3 is "corresponding to the start of the 45th special figure game after the end of the jackpot game state based on the" normal jackpot C ". It is updated from "44" to "45", and the variation number display 19SH3 with "44 games" is displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), it corresponds to the start of the first special figure game, which is the 45th special figure game after the end of the big hit game state based on the "normal big hit C". ,
Synchronized with the 1st special figure game, each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C of "left", "middle", "right"
The decorative pattern is variably displayed in 5R.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), corresponding to the start of the first special figure game,
In synchronization with the first special symbol game, the first small symbol is variably displayed in the first small symbol display area 19SH1.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), corresponding to the start of the first special figure game,
The number of hold displays in the first hold display area 5A has been reduced from four to three.

Then, when it is decided to execute the fluctuation number display notice in the fluctuation number display notice determination process shown in FIG. 9-7, the variable display during the variable display preset as the execution timing of the change number display notice according to the effect control pattern. At a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), the fluctuation number display notice is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), the effect 19SH4 is added to the fluctuation number display 19SH3 in response to the decision to execute the fluctuation number display notice of the fluctuation number display notice pattern “HP1-3”. A notice of the number of fluctuations that is displayed larger than the normal size is being executed.

Then, even if the variable display of the second special figure game ends while the variable number display notice is being executed corresponding to the first special figure game, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (D), the number of fluctuations is changed. The display notice will continue to be executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (D), the display result of the second small symbol is "lost" in the second small symbol display area 19SH2, corresponding to the display result of the second special figure game being "missing". "
Although the confirmed small symbol that becomes is stopped and displayed, the effect 19S is displayed on the fluctuation number display 19SH3.
The fluctuation number display notice that is displayed larger than the normal size by multiplying H4 is continuously executed.

Then, even when the change number display notice is being executed corresponding to the first special figure game, when the second special figure game is started, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (E), the jackpot game state is changed. The number of the fluctuation number display 19SH3 indicating the number of executions of the special figure game executed after the end is updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (E), the number of the fluctuation number display 19SH3 is "corresponding to the start of the 46th special figure game after the end of the jackpot game state based on the" normal jackpot C ". It is updated from "45" to "46", and the variation number display 19SH3 with "46 games" is displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (E), corresponding to the start of the second special figure game,
In synchronization with the second special figure game, the second small symbol is variably displayed in the second small symbol display area 19SH1, but the number of fluctuations is displayed larger than the normal size by applying the effect 19SH4 to the fluctuation number display 19SH3. The display notice is continuously executed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (E), corresponding to the start of the second special figure game,
The number of hold displays in the second hold display area 5B has been reduced from two to one.

Then, even when the second special figure game is being executed, when the first special figure game ends, FIG. 9-
As shown in 10 (F), the announcement of the number of fluctuations is finished.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (F), the second small symbol display area 1 is synchronized with the second special figure game.
Although the second small symbol is variably displayed in 9SH2, the first one corresponding to the change number display notice
Corresponding to the end of the special figure game, the change number display notice ends, and the change number display 19S
H3 is displayed in normal size without any effect.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), the decorative symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right" correspond to the display result of the first special figure game being "missing". On the predetermined effective lines in 5L, 5C, and 5R, the definite decorative symbol whose display result of the decorative symbol is "missing" is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), the display result of the first small symbol is displayed in the first small symbol display area 19SH1 corresponding to the display result of the first special figure game being "missing". The confirmed small symbol that becomes "missing" is stopped and displayed.

(Production mode of displaying the number of fluctuations during the first demo production)
Next, an effect mode of displaying the number of fluctuations during the first demo effect will be described. Figure 9-11
Is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of displaying the number of fluctuations during the first demo effect.

In the low probability / low base state (normal state), the first special figure game is not played, and the first
When the hold memory is not stored, the first demo effect is executed as shown in FIG. 9-11 (A). Note that FIG. 9-11 (A) shows a situation in which the second special figure game is not played and the second reserved memory is not stored.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), as the first demo effect, among the advance notice effects executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the notable advance notice effect is "display of the number of fluctuations". Notice "
, The effect of displaying the first demo effect image 19SH5, which introduces the "notice of cut-in during reach" and "notice of lamp at the time of winning", on the image display device 5 is being executed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), the number "45 games" corresponds to the fact that the special figure game was executed 45 times after the end of the jackpot game state based on the "normal jackpot C". 19SH3, which is a variation number display including characters and characters, is displayed.

Then, when an effective start prize is generated in the first start winning opening while the first demo effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (B1), the first demo effect is completed and the first demo effect is completed. The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed corresponding to the special figure game.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-11 (B1), the number of fluctuations corresponds to the fact that the first special figure game is started as the 45th special figure game after the end of the big hit game state based on the "normal big hit C". The number of the display 19SH3 is updated from "45" to "46", and the variation number display 19SH3 with "46 games" is displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-11 (B1), it corresponds to the start of the first special figure game, which is the 46th special figure game after the end of the big hit game state based on the "normal big hit C". , "Left", "Middle", "Right" decorative pattern display area 5L, 5 in synchronization with the 1st special figure game
The decorative design is variably displayed in C and 5R.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-11 (B1), in correspondence with the start of the first special figure game, the first small symbol display area 19SH1 is synchronized with the first special figure game. The design is variably displayed.

On the other hand, if an effective start prize is generated in the second start winning opening while the first demo effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (B2), the first demo effect is not completed. The variable display of the second small symbol is executed corresponding to the second special figure game.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-11 (B2), the second special figure game, which is the 46th special figure game after the end of the big hit game state based on the "normal big hit C", is started. 2
The second small symbol is variably displayed in the small symbol display area 19SH2, but as the first demo effect, a noteworthy advance notice effect among the advance notice effects executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state). However, the effect of displaying the first demo effect image 19SH5, which introduces the "notice of change number display", "notice of cut-in during reach", and "notice of lamp at the time of winning", is continuously executed.

(Modification example 1 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the above embodiment, if the second special figure game is started while the variable number display notice is being executed for the first special figure game, the second special figure game is finished when the first special figure game is finished. The configuration for ending the variable number display notice even if the game is not finished has been explained. In place of or in addition to such a configuration, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 is executing the fluctuation number display notice for the first special figure game, the second special figure game is played. When it is started, the announcement of the number of fluctuations may be canceled. In other words, the suggestion effect executing means stops the specific suggestion effect when the variable display of the second identification information is started while the specific suggestion effect is being executed for the variable display of the first identification information. May be good. According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be preferably executed and the specific display can be preferably displayed.

FIG. 9-12 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the fluctuation number display and the fluctuation number display notice in the low probability / low base state (normal state) according to the modification 1.

FIG. 9-12 (A) shows 45 after the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the “normal jackpot C”.
It is a figure which shows the situation which the variation number display notice is executed when the variable display of a decorative symbol is performed corresponding to the 1st special figure game which is the 3rd special figure game. In addition, FIG. 9-12 (A)
Indicates a situation in which the second special figure game is not played and the second hold memory is not stored.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (A), the first special figure game, which is the 45th special figure game after the end of the big hit game state based on the "normal big hit C", is being executed. "Left", "Middle", "Right" provided on the screen of the image display device 5 in synchronization with the first special figure game
Corresponding to the fact that the decorative symbols are variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and it is decided to execute the variation number display notice of the fluctuation number display notice pattern "HP1-3". , The fluctuation number display notice is executed in which the effect 19SH4 is applied to the fluctuation number display 19SH3 to display the fluctuation number display larger than the normal size.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (A), corresponding to the execution of the first special figure game, the first small symbol display area 19SH1 is synchronized with the first special figure game. Small symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (A), three hold displays are displayed in the first hold display area 5A.

Then, when the second special figure game is started as the 46th special figure game after the end of the big hit game state based on the "normal big hit C", as shown in FIG. 9-12 (B), the change number display notice is given. Is canceled.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (B), the number of fluctuations corresponds to the start of the second special figure game as the 46th special figure game after the end of the big hit game state based on the "normal big hit C". The display notice has been canceled, and the fluctuation number display 19SH3 is displayed in a normal size without applying an effect.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (B), corresponding to the start of the second special figure game,
In synchronization with the second special symbol game, the first small symbol is variably displayed in the second small symbol display area 19SH2.

(Modification example 2 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the above embodiment, regardless of whether or not there is a hold memory corresponding to the second special figure game.
The configuration that enables the notification of the number of fluctuations to be displayed has been explained. In place of or in addition to such a configuration, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 has a hold memory corresponding to the second special figure game, the fluctuation number display notice for the first special figure game is given. You may not execute it. Further, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 has a hold memory corresponding to the second special figure game, the execution rate of the variation number display notice for the first special figure game is compared with the execution rate of other notice effects. It may be lowered. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 12
If there is a hold memory corresponding to the second special figure game, 0 may execute the variation number display notice for the first special figure game in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize. In other words, the suggestion effect executing means includes a hold storage means for storing information related to the variable display as hold information.
When the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information is stored as the pending information, the execution of the specific suggestion effect for the variable display of the first identification information may be restricted. According to such a configuration
It is possible to preferably execute the suggestion effect and preferably display the specific display.

FIG. 9-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation number display notice determination process according to the modification 2 executed in step S171 of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9-1.

When the second special figure game in which the display result is "big hit" is not being executed in step 19SHS72 of the fluctuation number display notice determination process shown in FIG. 9-13 (step 19SHS72; No.
), The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special figure game is “0” (step 19SHS76).

In step 19SHS76, when the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special figure game is "0" (step 19SHS76; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is set to step 19.
The processing of SHS73 is executed.

In this way, when there is no hold memory corresponding to the second special figure game, the variable number display notice for the first special figure game can be executed.

In step 19SHS76, when the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special figure game is not "0" (step 19SHS76; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variation number display notice determination process.

In this way, when there is a hold memory corresponding to the second special figure game, the change number display notice for the first special figure game is not executed.

(Modification example 3 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the above embodiment, step 19SHS23 is a condition for starting the demonstration production.
In the demo production setting process of the above, the configuration for determining whether or not the customer waiting demo display specification command is received has been described. Instead of or in addition to such a configuration, for example, the demonstration effect may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of the variable display. Further, the demonstration effect may be started by detecting that the player is not in the gaming state by a sensor or the like. According to such a configuration, the demonstration effect can be started at a suitable timing.

(Modification example 4 of feature portion 19SH)
In the above-described embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a number is displayed so that the number of executions of the special figure game executed after the jackpot game state ends can be specified as the variation number display. In place of or in addition to such a configuration, for example, as a variation number display, a plurality of character images can be displayed so that the number of executions of the special figure game executed after the jackpot game state ends can be specified. It may be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of displaying the number of fluctuations.

(Variation example 5 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the above embodiment, as a notice of the number of fluctuations displayed, the expected degree of control to the jackpot game state is obtained by displaying the number of fluctuations displayed larger than the normal size or by applying an effect to the displayed number of fluctuations. The suggested configuration was explained. Instead of such a configuration
Or, in addition to such a configuration, for example, as a notice of the number of fluctuations, the color of the number of fluctuations may be displayed in a color different from the normal color, the number of fluctuations may be displayed by rotating, or the number of fluctuations may be displayed. By displaying while changing the shape of the display, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the variable number display notice.

(Variation example 6 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the above embodiment, when the current game state is the KT state, in other words, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special figure game is variably displayed, the variation corresponding to the second special figure game is performed. The configuration in which the number display notice is not executed has been explained. In place of or in addition to such a configuration, for example, if the current gaming state is the KT state, in other words, the second
When the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game is variablely displayed, the display result of the second special figure game becomes "big hit" corresponding to the second special figure game, and the game is controlled to the big hit game state. It may be possible to execute the fluctuation number display notice suggesting. In such a configuration, when the current game state is the KT state and the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special figure game is variably displayed, the variable number display notice corresponding to the first special figure game is performed. Should not be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the fluctuation number display notice even in the KT state.

(Modification example 7 of feature portion 19SH)
In the above embodiment, the CPU 103 may be set to any one of the six-step setting values having different jackpot winning probabilities. In other words, the gaming machine is a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player.
May be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The set value according to the modification 7 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value by a setting change operation using an operation means such as a predetermined switch by a person on the game hall side.

For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting change process that enables the jackpot winning probability set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be changed in response to the setting change operation. As a result, in the first special symbol normal process executed in step S110A of the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5, the jackpot winning probability can be changed by using the display result determination table according to the set value. The setting change process is executed. The setting change process can also be executed in the second special symbol process process executed in step S25B of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The set value is composed of, for example, 3 stages from 1 to 6, and the winning probability of the jackpot is in the order of set value 1 <set value 2 <set value 3 <set value 4 <set value 5 <set value 6 in order of advantage. Higher. The set value may be provided in a plurality of stages, and is not limited to the six stages. In this way, since the payout rate changes according to the changeability of the jackpot winning probability, it can be said that changing the set value changes the payout rate.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification 7, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the selection of the set value by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Of the 6 levels of setting values, for example, setting value 6
Is called a high setting with a high probability of winning a big hit, and a setting value of 1 may be called a low setting with a low probability of winning a big hit.

Further, the selection probability of the jackpot type may be changed by setting the setting values 1 to 6 as well as the winning probability of the jackpot. Further, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern may be changed by setting the set value 1 to the set value 6 as well as the winning probability of the big hit.

Further, for example, there may be a setting stage of a setting value less than the six types of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6, such as three types of setting stages of the setting value 1 to the setting value 3.

(Modification example 8 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the modification 7, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value. In other words, the gaming machine may be provided with a setting suggestion means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that gives a suggestion regarding the setting means. According to such a configuration
It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Modification example 9 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the modification 8, the effect control CPU 120 displays the variation number display in a special mode different from the normal mode and the specific mode of the variation number display notice as the setting suggestion effect.
Suggestions regarding the set value may be made. In other words, the setting suggestion means displays the specific display in a special mode different from the normal mode and the specific mode as the setting suggestion effect.
You may try to give suggestions regarding the setting means. With such a configuration, attention to the specific display can be increased.

(Modification example 10 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the modified example 9, the setting suggestion effect that displays the fluctuation number display in the special mode has a higher priority when executed than the fluctuation number display notice that displays the fluctuation number display in the specific mode, and is executed with priority. It may be done. In other words, the setting suggestion effect may have a higher priority than the specific suggestion effect. According to such a configuration, the setting suggestion effect is preferentially executed over the specific suggestion effect as the effect using the specific display, so that the effect that can specify valuable information for the player is executed rather than the specific suggestion effect. However, it can be prevented from being hindered by the specific suggestion effect.

(Modification example 11 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the modification 10, the effect control CPU 120 may draw a lottery for executing the setting suggestion effect by displaying the variation number of the special mode every time the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times. In other words, the setting suggesting means may determine whether or not to display the variable number display in a special mode each time the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times. With such a configuration, attention can be paid to the number of times the variable display is executed.

(Modification example 12 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the modification 8 to the modification 11, the effect control CPU 120 is used as a setting suggestion effect.
The effect related to the setting value suggestion suggesting which set value the set value is, and the effect related to the setting change suggestion suggesting that the set value has been changed may be executed. In other words, the setting suggestion means includes a first setting suggestion effect that suggests which set value the set value is, and a second setting suggestion effect that suggests that the set value has been changed. , May be feasible. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which setting suggestion effect is executed.

(Modification example 13 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the above embodiment, when a predetermined effect having a high expectation of a big hit, such as a super reach effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach, is executed, the fluctuation number display may not be displayed. Further, when the super reach effect is executed, the visibility of the variation number display may be lowered. In other words, the specific display means may limit the display of the specific display when a predetermined effect suggesting that the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is high is executed. According to such a configuration, when the predetermined effect is executed at the timing when the specific display can be displayed, the attention to the predetermined effect can be increased.

The predetermined effect according to the modification 13 is not limited to the super reach effect, but is, for example, a special effect after the character information of "super heat" indicating a state in which the jackpot expectation is extremely high is displayed, or a jackpot expectation. Any production may be targeted as long as it is a production with a high expectation of being a big hit, such as a so-called zone production in which a band character or the like indicates that the player is in a high production zone.

(Modification example 14 of feature portion 19SH)
In the modification 13, as the super reach effect, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of super reach effects having different jackpot expectations, and when a specific type of super reach effect is executed, the variation number display is not displayed. May be good. Further, when a specific type of super reach effect is executed, the visibility of the variation number display may be reduced. In other words, the specific display means may limit the display of the specific display when a specific type of predetermined effect among a plurality of types of predetermined effects is executed. With such a configuration, attention can be raised to a specific type of predetermined effect.

(Variation example 15 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the above-described embodiment, the advantageous states advantageous to the player include, in addition to the jackpot gaming state, other advantageous states such as a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state. Further, the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player may include a state in which small hits can occur frequently and a ball can be obtained by the small hits, such as a so-called small hit rush state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation controlled by various advantageous states by the suggestion effect.

(Modification example 16 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the above-described embodiment, the configuration of shifting to the jackpot game state based on the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol has been described. In place of or in addition to such a configuration, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has won a V prize in the V winning opening in the accessory provided in the game area. It may be possible to migrate to. In other words, the game machine may be controllable in an advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area in the variable winning ball device provided in the game area. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

(Modification example 17 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the modified example 16, the launch promotion notification to the V winning opening may be executed. In other words, it may be provided with a launch promotion notification means for executing a launch promotion notification that prompts the user to fire toward a specific area. According to such a configuration, a suitable game method can be taught to a player who is unfamiliar with the game.

(Modification example 18 of feature portion 19SH)
In the modified example 17, as the setting suggestion effect according to the modified example 8, the setting value may be suggested by notifying the launch promotion notification in a mode different from the normal mode. In other words, the setting suggestion means may give a suggestion about the setting means by notifying the launch promotion notification in a mode different from the normal mode as the setting suggestion effect. It is possible to raise the attention to the launch promotion notification.

(Variation example 19 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the above embodiment, the continuous number display indicating the number of continuous fluctuations in which the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is continuously executed may be displayed. In other words, a special display means for displaying a special display capable of specifying the number of times of execution of the variable display executed continuously may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by displaying the special display.

The continuous number display is a display of a numerical image indicating the number of continuous fluctuations in which the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is continuously executed in the image display device 5. The interlocking number display also has a meaning as a display of the number of consecutive hold display in which the hold display is continuously displayed. Therefore, the continuous number of times display may also be referred to as the continuous number of times of the hold display, such as "holding COMBO display". The continuous count display starts counting and displaying from "0" when the power is turned on, and is temporarily reset when the variable display becomes discontinuous or a big hit game state occurs, and counting and displaying resumes from "0". Will be done.

(Modification example 20 of feature portion 19SH)
In the modification 19, the effect control CPU 120 executes a continuous number display notice suggesting the degree of expectation to be controlled in the jackpot game state by displaying the continuous number display in a mode different from the normal mode as a notice effect. You may do so. In other words, the means of executing the suggestion effect is
As the suggestion effect, by displaying the special display in a special mode different from the normal mode, it may be possible to execute the special suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state. With such a configuration, attention to the special display can be increased.

(Modification example 21 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the modification 20, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the fluctuation number display notice and the continuous number display notice overlapped with each other, one of them is preferentially executed. May be good. In other words, when the suggestion effect execution means overlaps the execution of the specific suggestion effect and the execution of the special suggestion effect, one of the suggestion effects may be preferentially executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect of any of the suggestion effects from being lowered.

(Variation example 22 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the modification 21, the effect control CPU 120 gives priority to either one based on the relationship between the number of times the variable display is executed specified by the variable number display and the number of times the variable display is executed specified by the continuous number display. And execute it. In other words, the suggestion effect execution means gives priority to either one based on the relationship between the number of times the variable display specified by the specific suggestion effect is executed and the number of times the variable display specified by the special suggestion effect is executed. May be feasible. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest based on the number of times the variable display is executed.

(Modification example 23 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the modification 19, the effect control CPU 120 provides a suggestion regarding the set value by displaying the continuous number display in a special mode different from the normal mode and the continuous number display notice mode as the setting suggestion effect according to the modification 8. The setting suggestion effect to be performed may be executed. In other words, the setting suggestion means may make a suggestion about the setting means by displaying the special display in a special mode different from the normal mode and the mode of the special suggestion effect as the setting suggestion effect. With such a configuration, attention to the special display can be increased.

(Modification example 24 of the feature portion 19SH)
In the modification 23, when the effect control CPU 120 overlaps the setting suggestion effect that displays the variation number display in the special mode and the setting suggestion effect that displays the continuous number display in the special mode, these setting suggestions The effects may not be executed at the same time. In other words, when the setting suggestion means overlaps the first setting suggestion effect that displays the specific display in the special mode and the second setting suggestion effect that displays the special display in the special mode, the first setting suggestion means. The effect and the second setting suggestion effect may not be executed at the same time. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to a contradiction between the setting suggestion content of the first setting suggestion effect and the setting suggestion content of the second setting suggestion effect. can do.

(Explanation of means related to feature 19SH)
In relation to the feature unit 19SH described above, a specific display that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, executes a variable display, and can specify the number of times the variable display is executed after the advantageous state ends. A game machine that displays and executes a suggestion effect suggesting an expectation degree controlled in an advantageous state has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-093793). JP 2017-
According to the invention described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 093793, there is a possibility that the suggestion effect cannot be suitably executed in a gaming machine capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel. There is.

Therefore, in a gaming machine capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel, it is advantageous for the player as a gaming machine for suitably executing the suggestion effect. A gaming machine that can control the state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can control a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player), and a variable display means that executes a variable display (for example, a special figure game is executed). CPU 103, etc.), a specific display means for displaying a specific display capable of specifying the number of times the variable display is executed after the advantageous state ends (for example, execution of a special figure game executed after the jackpot game state ends). An effect control CPU 120 or the like that displays a variation number display capable of specifying the number of times, a suggestion effect execution means that executes a suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state, and (for example, a jackpot gaming state is controlled). The variable display means can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel. (For example, CPU10
3 is that the first special figure game and the second special figure game can be executed in parallel, etc.), and the specific display means is the number of times the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second identification. The specific display can be displayed so that the total number of times the variable display of information is executed can be specified (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the number of times the first special figure game is executed and the number of times the second special figure game is executed. The number of executions and the total number of times can be specified, and the variation number display can be displayed, etc.), and the suggestion effect execution means displays the specific display in a specific mode different from the normal mode as the suggestion effect. By
It is possible to execute a specific suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the fluctuation number display larger than the normal size or change the number of fluctuations as the advance notice effect. By applying an effect to the display, it is possible to execute a variable number display notice that suggests the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state), and it is controlled to a predetermined game state different from the advantageous state. Occasionally, the specific suggestion effect can be executed for the variable display of the first identification information, and the specific suggestion effect is not executed for the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a big hit. When controlled to a low probability / low base state (normal state) different from the game state, it is possible to execute a change number display notice for the first special figure game and change for the second special figure game. Do not execute the number display notice, etc.)
It may be a game machine characterized by this.

According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be suitably executed in the game machine capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel.

As the game machine of the means 2 according to the feature unit 19SH, the specific display means responds to the execution of the variable display of the second identification information even when the variable display of the first identification information is not executed. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 updates the mode of the specific display according to the execution of the second special figure game even when the first special figure game is not executed.
The gaming machine of means 1 may be characterized in that (for example, updating the number of the variable number display indicating the number of executions of the special figure game executed after the jackpot game state is completed).

According to such a configuration, a specific display can be preferably displayed.

As the game machine of the means 3 according to the feature unit 19SH, the specific display means started the variable display of the second identification information when the specific suggestion effect was executed for the variable display of the first identification information. In this case, the mode of the specific display is updated (for example, when the second special figure game is started while the effect control CPU 120 is executing the change number display notice for the first special figure game, the change occurs. It may be a game machine of means 1 or means 2 characterized in that the number displayed on the number of times is updated, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be preferably executed and the specific display can be preferably displayed.

As the game machine of the means 4 according to the feature unit 19SH, the suggestion effect executing means starts the variable display of the second identification information when the specific suggestion effect is executed with respect to the variable display of the first identification information. In this case, even if the variable display of the second identification information is not finished when the variable display of the first identification information is finished, the specific suggestion effect is finished (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the first special figure. If the second special figure game is started while the variable number display notice is being executed for the game, the change occurs even if the second special figure game is not finished when the first special figure game ends. It may be any game machine of means 1 to means 3 characterized by (terminating the number-of-times display notice, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be preferably executed and the specific display can be preferably displayed.

As the gaming machine of the means 5 according to the feature unit 19SH, the suggestion effect executing means starts the variable display of the second identification information when the specific suggestion effect is executed with respect to the variable display of the first identification information. In that case, the specific suggestion effect is canceled (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the first
Any of means 1 to 4 characterized in that, if the second special figure game is started while the change number display notice is being executed for the special figure game, the change number display notice is stopped, etc.). It may be the game machine.

According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be preferably executed and the specific display can be preferably displayed.

As the game machine of the means 6 according to the feature unit 19SH, a hold storage means for storing information related to the variable display as hold information is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means stores information related to the variable display of the second identification information as hold information. If so, the execution of the specific suggestion effect for the variable display of the first identification information is restricted (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 has a hold memory corresponding to the second special figure game, the first special figure game The change number display notice for the first special figure game is not executed, the execution rate of the change number display notice for the first special figure game is set to be lower than the execution rate of other notice effects, and the first special figure game The game machine may be any of means 1 to 5, characterized in that the notification of the number of fluctuations displayed with respect to the above is executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be preferably executed and the specific display can be preferably displayed.

(Explanation related to association of feature parts)
Each configuration related to the feature unit 19SH may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature unit. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9… Game effect lamp 10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… Lamp control board 15… Relay board 17… Special variable winning ball device 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate Switch 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Ball hitting operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Variable display means to execute variable display and
A specific display means for displaying a specific display capable of specifying the number of times the variable display is executed after the advantageous state ends, and a specific display means.
The suggestion effect execution means for executing the suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state, and the suggestion effect execution means.
With
The variable display means can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel.
As a predetermined gaming state different from the advantageous state, it is possible to control a first predetermined gaming state and a second predetermined gaming state that is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the first predetermined gaming state.
The specific display means
The specific display can be displayed so that the total number of times the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the number of times the variable display of the second identification information is executed can be specified.
Before Symbol suggested directing execution means,
As the suggested effect, by displaying the specific display in a conventional manner and different specific embodiment is capable of executing a specific suggestion effect suggests expectation controlled in the preferred state,
When being controlled pre SL to a first predetermined gaming state, being capable of performing the specific suggestion effect to the variable display of the first identification information, the specific suggestion effect to the variable display of the second identification information A game machine characterized by not executing.

Images